JP2024053110A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine capable of optimally increasing attention to the game. [Solution] When a winning entry occurs in an actuation port provided in the play area, a lottery is executed in the MPU of the main control device to transition to an open/close execution mode, and the variable display time of the image on the actuation port display section of the main display unit is determined. Information such as the result of the transition lottery and the variable display time is input from the main control device to the notification/performance control device. The MPU of the notification/performance control device determines the performance on the pattern display device based on this information. A normal performance mode and a special performance mode are provided as performance modes for the pattern display device. In the special performance mode, the execution mode of the special performance in the current game round is determined based on the variable display time for the current game round, the variable display time for the subsequent game round, and the result of the transition lottery. [Selected Figure] Fig. 53

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that changes the display of pictures on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the display of changing pictures begins. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed as a final stop on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-074175 A

In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase the attention given to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in order to increase the attention given to games.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

The following describes the means to solve the above problems.

The present invention relates to
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player;
The game machine is provided with a game round control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game round operation is performed, with one game round being counted as a single game round, from the start of the game round operation until the notification result corresponds to the judgment result of the award judgment means and the game round operation is ended.

The present invention can effectively increase attention to the game.

1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board unit. This is an oblique view of the game board unit from the rear. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the configuration of the inner frame. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. A front view showing the rear pack unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram for explaining the display contents on the display screen of the pattern display device. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in lotteries, etc. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a win/lose table. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams showing an allocation table, and FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between winning types and support modes. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the MPU of the main control device. A flowchart showing the winning process for an operating port. 13 is a flowchart showing an information acquisition process. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the MPU of the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a game play control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a data setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process. (a) Flowchart showing the process of setting the variable display time; (b) Schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for when a reach does not occur, referenced in the low frequency support mode; (c) Schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for when a reach does not occur, referenced in the high frequency support mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device and the display control device. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the variable display control processing by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for starting fluctuations. 13 is a flowchart showing processing for a special effect mode. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display modes, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an overview of each variable display mode. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram for explaining the flow of pseudo continuous variation display. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of a game presentation corresponding to a pseudo continuous change display, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the color of the effect and the probability of winning a jackpot. (a) A schematic diagram showing the display content in the time-saving presentation mode, (b) a timing chart showing the flow of the game presentation. A schematic diagram showing the flow of game presentation during the time-saving presentation mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for hold notice executed by the MPU of the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting a hold command executed by the MPU of the main control device. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the preview performance, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display time and the variable display mode in each performance mode. 13A is a flowchart showing the effect setting process for a special effect mode executed by the MPU of the notification/effect control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the special effect setting process for a reach. 13 is a flowchart showing a reach-type performance pattern setting process. 1A is a schematic diagram illustrating a first special pattern table; FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram illustrating a second special pattern table; FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of game presentation using the first special presentation pattern. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of game presentation using the second special presentation pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing a special effect setting process for a complete miss. 13 is a flowchart showing a first setting process. 13A is a schematic diagram illustrating a fifth special pattern table, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram illustrating a sixth special pattern table. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of game presentations based on the fifth special pattern and the sixth special pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing a second setting process. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram illustrating a ninth special pattern table, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram illustrating a tenth special pattern table. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of game presentations based on the ninth and tenth special patterns. FIG. A schematic diagram showing the relationship between the start timing of reach display and the number of parts in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing the link setting process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between previous and subsequent game rounds. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the confirmed display time of a pattern and the stopped display time of a pattern. (a) A flowchart showing the standby display control process executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and whether or not standby display is possible. A schematic diagram showing the flow of a game presentation. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the confirmed display time of a pattern and the stopped display time of a pattern.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and Figures 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 in an expanded form. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the components inside the game area of the pachinko machine 10 are omitted in Figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a main machine part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is formed by connecting four long frame materials on all four sides, and is formed into a rectangular frame shape overall. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing this outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be attached to the island equipment of the game hall, etc.

The gaming machine main section 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a state in which it can be opened and closed. Specifically, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to the connection between the upper frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11, and a lower support bracket 18 is provided at the connection between the lower frame section and the left frame section of the outer frame 11. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism, which allows the gaming machine main section 12 to rotate forward of the pachinko machine 10 with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the outer frame 11 (see Figures 3 and 4).

As shown in Figures 3 and 4, the gaming machine main part 12 comprises an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported rotatably relative to the outer frame 11. In detail, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end of rotation and the right side as the tip end of rotation when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as the base end and the right side as the tip end when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in Fig. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an external shape substantially identical to that of the outer frame 11, and covers substantially the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the center of the frame body 20, which allows substantially the entire playing area, which will be described later, to be viewed from the front, and the window portion 21 is blocked from the rear surface side of the front door frame 14 by a glass unit 22.

The glass unit 22 comprises a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition that separates the holding area of the glass panels 23 into front and rear, and the two glass panels 23 face each other from the front and rear with the partition in between. In other words, by ensuring a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, interference between the glass panels 23 is avoided, and the playing area PE is doubly covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

It is not necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be attached individually to the frame body 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one, or three or more.

Around the glass unit 22 (more specifically, the window section 21), various light-emitting means such as lamps are provided. For example, a circular illumination section 26 incorporating a light-emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window section 21. The circular illumination section 26 lights up or blinks in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached. In addition, an error display lamp section 27 that lights up when an error or other malfunction occurs is provided at the center of the circular illumination section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and prize ball lamp sections 28 that light up during prize ball payout are provided on the left and right sides of the error display lamp section 27. In addition, speaker sections 29 that output sound effects and background music according to the game state are provided near the left and right prize ball lamp sections 28 (see FIG. 3). The speaker section 29 switches background music according to the game state to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Below the window 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulge 31 and a lower bulge 32 that bulge toward the front are arranged side by side. An upper tray 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge 31, and a lower tray 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge 32 (see Figure 2). The upper tray 33 has the function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from the payout device described below, and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described below while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 34 has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 33 and the function of a receiving tray for storing game balls that are fired by the game ball firing mechanism but do not reach the game area PE (see Figure 3) when the game balls are returned to the player.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided to the right of the lower bulge 32 so as to protrude towards the front. When the game ball launching handle 41 is operated, a game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described below. The launch speed of the game ball increases as the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launching handle 41 increases, and the game ball will reach the game area PE when this operation amount is adjusted by the player to a predetermined amount. Furthermore, by adjusting this operation amount, the player can selectively hit the game ball into the right route or left route described below.

As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is molded from synthetic resin and has a front door side upper tray passage that leads to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage that leads to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed at the upper corner, and the receiving portion is divided into left and right by a partition wall to separate the entrance portion of the front door side upper tray passage and the entrance portion of the front door side lower tray passage. The upstream side of the front door side upper tray passage and the front door side lower tray passage lead to the game ball distribution section described later, and game balls that enter the front door side upper tray passage are guided to the upper tray 33, and game balls that enter the front door side lower tray passage are guided to the lower tray 34.

The rear surface of the front door frame 14 has protruding shafts at its upper and lower ends on the pivot base side. These protruding shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 5. Figure 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. Note that, for the sake of convenience, the configuration within the play area PE of the pachinko machine 10 has been omitted in Figure 5, just like Figure 3.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50, the outer shape of which is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The inner frame base body 50 is disposed close to the upper frame part of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame part of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A fascia board is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The fascia board is disposed below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, its lower end part), and when the inner frame 13 is closed to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the fascia board. A slight clearance may be provided between the fascia board and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference, etc.

Support brackets 71, 72 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the pivot base side (left side in FIG. 5) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although not shown, the support brackets 71, 72 have shafts, and bearings provided on the front door frame 14 are inserted into these shafts, so that the front door frame 14 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is provided on the rotation tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end of the inner frame base body 50 (the vertical frame member described later), and has front door hook members 76 arranged in a scattered manner in its longitudinal direction (vertical direction). The inner frame base body 50 has slits formed to correspond to each front door hook member 76 and hook receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back side of the front door frame 14 for protruding to the front side of the inner frame 13. The front door hook members 76 protruding through the slits are engaged with the hook receiving members 49 provided on the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76, thereby locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. The locking device 75 also has inner frame hook members 77 (see FIG. 4) that extend to the rear side of the inner frame 13. These inner frame hook members 77 hook onto hook receiving members 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, thereby locking the gaming machine main part 12 in a closed state relative to the outer frame 11.

The inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75) is provided with a cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75. The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (hook members 76, 77 and interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and when the key inserted in the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise), the inner frame 13 is unlocked from the outer frame 11.

A storage recess 51 is formed in the center of the inner frame base body 50 to store the game board unit 80. The storage recess is recessed toward the rear of the gaming machine to match the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is fixed in place by a manual locking mechanism while fitting into this storage recess 51 from the front of the gaming machine. A roughly rectangular window hole 52 is formed in the bottom of the storage recess 51, and the rear structure of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b described later) protrudes from this window hole 52 to the rear of the inner frame 13. Note that almost the entire area of this window hole 52 is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the game board unit 80 attached to the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is formed by integrating a game area forming body 80a, on the front of which is formed a game area PE where game balls flow down, and a back block 80b, which is provided on the back side of the game area forming body 80a and on which various game parts (e.g., a variable display unit, a control device, a movable performance mechanism, a luminous decorative member, etc.) described later are mounted on a base body 251. The game area forming body 80a is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the front part of the back block 80b is visible through the game area forming body 80a.

As already explained, the play area PE is covered by a glass unit 22 (more specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The glass unit 22 is positioned so that the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the play area forming body 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of a play ball, i.e., so that the play balls flowing down the play area PE are not lined up front and back at the same point in the play area PE. This prevents balls from clogging the play area PE.

The game board unit 80 (particularly the various components arranged in the game area PE of the game area forming body 80a) will be described below with reference to Figures 6 and 7. Figure 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and Figure 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as seen from the rear.

The play area forming body 80a has a plurality of large and small openings that penetrate in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the play area forming body 80a. As shown in FIG. 6, each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, a variable winning device 82, an operating opening 83a, 83b, a through gate 84, etc. When game balls enter the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating openings 83a, 83b, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry section, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is given to the player based on the detection result. In addition, an outlet 89 is provided at the bottom of the play area forming body 80a, and game balls that do not enter the various ball entry sections are discharged from the play area PE through the outlet 89. In the following explanation, to clearly distinguish from game balls entering the outlet 89, game balls entering the general winning port 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating ports 83a and 83b will also be referred to as "winning."

In addition, numerous nail members 93 are planted in the game area forming body 80a to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills 94 are arranged. The various configurations of these nail members 93 and windmills 94 differentiate the flow path of the game balls, and adjustments are made so that winning the above-mentioned general winning hole 81 etc. occurs with an appropriate probability.

A central opening 85 is formed in the center of the play area forming body 80a, and a transparent opening cover 86 is attached so as to cover this central opening 85 from the rear side of the play area forming body 80a. Behind this central opening 85, the variable display unit 252 belonging to the rear block 80b is located, and the variable display unit 252 etc. can be seen through the central opening 85 (opening cover 86) from the front of the game machine. For ease of explanation, in Figure 6, the opening cover 86 is shown by a two-dot chain line to show the state in which the variable display unit 252 is visible.

Operating ports 83a, 83b and a through gate 84 are arranged around the central opening 85. The operating ports 83a, 83b are composed of an upper operating port 83a arranged below the variable display unit 252 and a lower operating port 83b arranged directly below the upper operating port 83a. In particular, the lower operating port (lottery trigger ball entry section) 83b is provided with an electric device 91 as an opening/closing type ball entry assistance device (ball entry assistance means) or an opening/closing member (opening/closing means). The electric device 91 has a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and the position of the movable piece is changed by the drive unit, so that it can be switched between an open state (assistance state) in which a ball can be entered into the lower operating port 83b and a closed state (non-assistance state) in which the ball cannot be entered. Note that the closed state of the electric device 91 is sufficient as long as it is more difficult to enter the ball than the open state, and it is not necessarily necessary to make the ball enter impossible.

The through gate 84 is located in the game area PE at a position upstream of the lower operating port 83b (more specifically, to the side of the variable display unit 252), and if a lottery is won when the game ball passes through the through gate 84, the electric device 91 is switched from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

When a ball enters the upper actuation port 83a, three game balls are dispensed, and when a ball enters the lower actuation port 83b, four game balls are dispensed, but the number of game balls dispensed is not limited to the above. However, for example, to increase the advantage of the lower actuation port 83b over the upper actuation port 83a, it is preferable to set the number of balls dispensed related to the lower actuation port 83b greater than the number of balls dispensed related to the upper actuation port 83a.

The variable winning device (special ball winning device or special ball winning means) 82 has a large winning opening that leads to the back side of the play area forming body 80a, and an opening/closing door is provided as an opening/closing member (opening/closing means) that opens and closes the large winning opening. The opening/closing door can be switched between an open state (assistance state) in which the game ball can enter and a closed state (non-assistance state) in which the game ball cannot enter. The opening/closing door is connected to a variable winning drive unit (solenoid in detail) provided on the back side of the play area forming body 80a, and the opening/closing door is normally kept in the closed state, and is switched to the open state when an internal lottery is selected to transition to an opening/closing execution mode (opening/closing execution state) (a big win: when the transition to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is achieved). It is sufficient that the closed state of the opening/closing door makes it more difficult to enter the ball compared to the open state, and it is not necessarily necessary to make the ball unable to enter the ball.

The opening and closing execution mode is a mode to which the mode is switched when a big win is won. The opening manner of the variable winning device 82 in the opening and closing execution mode is set so that the opening and closing door is repeatedly opened up to a maximum of multiple rounds (for example, 4, 8, or 16 rounds), with one round being the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes (for example, 10 prizes).

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given about the variable display unit 252. The variable display unit 252 has a pattern display device 253 that variably displays (variably displays) patterns when a winning entry into the operating port 83a, 83b is triggered. The pattern display device 253 is configured as a liquid crystal display device with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, for example, patterns are displayed in a line at the top, middle, and bottom, and these patterns are variably displayed by scrolling in the left and right direction. Then, when a jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of patterns (pattern combination) is displayed stationary on a preset pay line, and the above-mentioned opening and closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot) is entered. Note that the pattern display device 253 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

The play area forming body 80a is provided with a center frame 95 surrounding the central opening 85. The center frame 95 is fixed to the play area forming body 80a (specifically, a plate body) from its front side, and in this fixed state, it stands up from the front of the play area forming body 80a, so that the gap dimension between the center frame 95 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the play ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the play area PE from colliding with the pattern display device 253, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the play area PE is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the variable display unit 252 (specifically, the center frame 95) from the right side and a route that bypasses it from the left side.

A stage section is formed on the upper surface of the frame section that constitutes the lower part of the center frame 95, allowing game balls to roll left and right. Game balls that flow in from inlets formed in the left and right frame sections of the center frame 95 are discharged onto the stage section through a warp passage also formed in the center frame 95. The stage section is configured so that game balls that reach the stage section can relatively easily flow into the upper operating port 83a, which contributes to increasing the player's attention to the movement of the game balls on the stage section. In this embodiment, as described above, the central opening 85 is covered by the transparent opening cover 86, and game balls that reach the stage section are restricted from moving toward the rear block 80b (variable display unit 252).

The actuation openings 83a, 83b are positioned closer to the central opening 85 (variable display unit 252). Since a win at the actuation openings 83a, 83b can trigger a transition to a special game state, it is thought that the player will pay attention to whether or not a win will be made at the actuation openings 83a, 83b, and also to the symbol display device 253 to determine whether or not a transition to a special game state will occur. Providing the actuation openings 83a, 83b closer to the variable display unit 252 is a device to concentrate the player's attention on the area around the variable display unit 252.

A play area partitioning member 99 is disposed at the right end of the play area forming body 80a (the rotating tip of the play board unit 80 described later), which defines the play area PE together with the guide rail 100 described later. A stopper member is disposed on the play area partitioning member 99, against which game balls flying along the main display unit 87 and guide rail 100 collide. The stopper member is a buffer member disposed near the tip of the guide rail 100, and game balls that collide with the stopper member have their momentum weakened before flowing down the play area PE. In other words, the stopper member is endowed with a force-reducing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game balls.

Here, we will provide additional information about the main display unit 87. The main display unit 87 is embedded in the play area partition member 99, and a portion of it is positioned so that it faces the glass unit 22. This facing portion is provided with a main display section D on which a predetermined image or the like is displayed. The main display unit 87 is electrically connected to a main control device, which will be described later, and the display content of the main display section D is controlled by the main control device.

The main display unit D comprises an upper operating port display unit UD which displays the results of a lottery based on winning at the upper operating port 83a, and a lower operating port display unit LD which displays the results of a lottery based on winning at the lower operating port 83b. In the upper operating port display unit UD, a winning at the upper operating port 83a is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and the result of the stopping of the changing display is clearly displayed as the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the upper operating port 83a. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning at the upper operating port 83a is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the changing display is stopped in the upper operating port display unit, a specified pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the above-mentioned opening/closing execution mode is transitioned to.

In the lower operating port display unit LD, a winning entry into the lower operating port 83b is used as a trigger to display a changing pattern, and the result of the display stopping is the clear display of the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 83b. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the lower operating port 83b is a winning result corresponding to a jackpot, the display stopping is stopped in the lower operating port display unit LD, a specified pattern is displayed as the stopping result, and then the above-mentioned opening/closing execution mode is entered according to the result.

Here, based on a winning entry into any of the actuation ports 83a, 83b, the display of the corresponding actuation port display unit UD, LD is started, and the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state, and then the pattern is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined stopped display time (determined display time) until the fixed display ends corresponds to one game round. However, one game round is not limited to the above content, and for example, in a configuration in which a single display area is provided and the variable display is performed in the single display area regardless of whether a winning entry into any of the actuation ports 83a, 83b occurs, it is also possible to count one game round as the period from when the variable display is started in the single display area, when the variable display is stopped with the specified stopped result displayed, to when the fixed display ends. Note that the variable display of the pattern in each actuation port display unit UD, UL does not necessarily have to be started when the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the actuation port 83a, 83b is executed, and it is also possible to configure it to start before the internal lottery based on the winning entry into the actuation port 83a, 83b is executed.

In addition to the above two display sections, the main display section D of the main display unit 87 is also provided with a through gate display section that displays the lottery results based on winning at the through gate 84. In the through gate display section, winning at the through gate 84 is used as a trigger to display the changing patterns, and the result of the stopping of the changing display is displayed as the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning at the through gate 84. If the result of the internal lottery based on winning at the through gate 84 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role opening state, a predetermined stopping result is displayed on the through gate display section, the changing display is stopped, and then the state transitions to the electric role opening state. In the electric role opening state, the electric role 91 provided in the lower operating port 83b is opened in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that a game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is reserved up to four times, and the main display section D of the main display unit 87 is provided with a reserved number display section that displays the number of reserved balls.

The main display section D described above can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls are prevented from moving in front of the main display section D, ensuring visibility.

Referring again to FIG. 5 to explain the configuration of the inner frame 13, below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, a game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided that launches game balls into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launching handle 41.

(Game ball launching mechanism 110)
The game ball launching mechanism 110 mainly comprises a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch waiting position, a launch rail 112 that determines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, a ball delivery device 113 that supplies the game ball to the launch waiting position, and a base plate 114 on which these various components 111 to 113 are mounted, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50, thereby being integrated with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so that it slopes upward toward the play area forming body 80a. The launch rail 112 is formed with a groove with a roughly V-shaped cross section, and is configured so that the game ball fits into the groove to determine the front-to-rear position of the game ball.

A ball stopper that stops the game balls supplied from the ball sending device 113 in the above-mentioned launch waiting position is located near the downstream end (i.e., the lower end) of the launch rail 112. The solenoid 111 is located further downstream than the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to the power supply and launch control device, which will be described later. Based on the output of an electrical signal from the power supply and launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the extension/contraction direction, causing the game ball placed in the launch standby position to be launched toward the play area forming body 80a, more specifically, toward the guide rail 100 attached to the play area forming body 80a.

The guide rail 100, together with the play area partitioning member 99 fixed to the play area forming body 80a (specifically, the front surface of the plate), partitions the play area PE so that the outer shape of the play area PE is approximately circular. The guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is partitioned and formed by both rails 101 and 102. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 that opens at the tip side (diagonally downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located at the top of the play area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the play area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guide rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). In addition, a return prevention member 106 is attached to the front side of the exit portion 105 of the play area forming body 80a, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101, to prevent game balls that have reached the play area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103, preventing game balls that have already reached the play area PE from interfering with the launch of subsequent game balls.

Each of the rails 101, 102 that make up the guide rail 100 is arc-shaped with its center at approximately the center of the play area PE. For this reason, a game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, i.e., while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated by the game ball itself. In other words, when a game ball is launched so as to reach the play area PE, the area of the guide passage 103 along the outer rail 102 essentially constitutes a passing area (passing path) through which the game ball passes, and the area along the inner rail 101 is essentially an area through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, the guide rail 100 and launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the play area forming body 80a. In other words, the rails 100, 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are offset left and right near the lower edge of the play area forming body 80a. This brings the rails 100, 112 closer to the lower edge of the play area forming body 80a, while forming a predetermined gap between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is disposed below the gap thus formed. The foul ball passage is molded integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If a game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 does not reach the play area PE and returns inside the guide passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball will enter the foul ball passage through the above-mentioned gap. The foul ball passage leads to the lower tray passage on the front door side, and game balls that enter the foul ball passage are discharged to the lower tray 34 shown in Figure 1. This prevents interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

A rail cover 107 is provided on the left end of the play area forming body 80a so as to cover the outer rail 102 from the side. The game board unit 80 is often handled individually during manufacturing and maintenance work, at which time the outer rail 102 may collide with the game table or the like. The rail cover 107 is a component that is installed in consideration of such circumstances, and is provided with a protective function that prevents the outer rail 102 from being deformed by the above-mentioned factors and the like.

A through hole is formed in the inner frame base body 50 to the left of the launch rail 112 (more specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) that penetrates the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction, and a passage forming member 121 is disposed in this through hole. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50 and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 are connected to the game ball distribution section described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side upper plate passage 122, and the front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

An opening/closing member 124 that opens and closes the upper tray passage 122 on the main body side and the lower tray passage 123 on the main body side is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 50. The opening/closing member 124 is biased to a forward position that closes the upper tray passage 122 on the main body side and the lower tray passage 123 on the main body side, and when the front door frame 14 is opened, this biasing force causes each opening/closing member 124 to be in a closed state, thereby preventing game balls from falling out of each passage 122, 123. In contrast, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening/closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the upper tray passage 122 on the main body side and the upper tray passage on the front door side are connected, and further, the lower tray passage 123 on the main body side and the lower tray passage on the front door side are connected.

Next, the rear structure of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base body 50 and the game board unit 80) will be described with reference to Figures 7 and 8. Figure 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in Figure 8, a bearing fitting 132 is attached to the pivot base end side (right side in Figure 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing fitting 132 at vertical intervals, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. In addition, a plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state.

As already explained, a window hole 52 is formed in the bottom of the storage recess (game board storage section) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and is open to the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 stored in the storage recess 51. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back of the game board unit 80 (back block 80b), and these various components are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. Here, the configuration of the back of the game board unit 80 will be explained.

As already explained, the rear block 80b is attached to the rear of the play area forming body 80a. The rear block 80b has a roughly box-shaped base body 251 that is open on the side of the play area forming body 80a, and this base body 251 is fixed to the rear of the play area forming body 80a, thereby integrating the play area forming body 80a and the rear block 80b.

The front side of the base body 251 is an area for arranging the movable performance mechanism and the luminous decorative members, while the rear side is an area for arranging the control device that controls these various components and the variable display unit 252 (pattern display device 253) mentioned above.

More specifically, a portion of the base body 251 protrudes from the rear side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-mentioned pattern display device 253 (see FIG. 6) and a display control device for driving the pattern display device 253 are attached to this protruding portion. The pattern display device 253 and the display control device are stacked in the front-to-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50) so that the pattern display device is at the front and the display control device is at the rear. Furthermore, the notification/performance control device 140 is mounted on the rear portion of the base body 251, positioned behind the display control device.

The notification/performance control device 140 is equipped with a notification/performance control board that controls audio output, lamp display, and display control device according to instructions from the main control device described below, and the notification/performance control board is housed in a board box 141 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

A main control device unit 160 is provided below the notification/performance control device 140, covering the base body 96 from the rear. The main control device unit 160 has a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the rear of the game board unit 80 (more specifically, the rear block 80b), and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 162 has a main control board that has the function of controlling the main game (main control circuit) and the function of monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit), and the main control board is housed in a board box 163 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

The substrate box 163 comprises a box base (front case body) of a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (rear case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other by a box sealing section 164 as a sealing means so that they cannot be opened, thereby sealing the substrate box 163. A plurality of box sealing sections 164 are provided on the short sides of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing section 164 as long as it is configured to connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner, but the box base and the box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that constitutes the box sealing section 164. The sealing process by the box sealing section 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily, and it is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been opened once. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole of the multiple box sealing sections 164. Then, when the board box 163 is opened, such as when a malfunction occurs in the stored main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connection part between the box sealing section into which the locking pin is inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is cut. This separates the box base and box cover of the board box 163, and the main control board inside can be removed. If the sealing process is to be performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If a record of the board box 163 being opened is left on the board box 163, unauthorized opening can be easily detected by looking at the board box 163.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected by the base seal 165 in an unopenable manner. More specifically, the base seal 165 has a locking hole and a locking pin, just like the box seal 164, and the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected inseparably by inserting the locking pin into the locking hole. This makes it easier to know if the board box 163 has been illegally removed.

In the front part of the base body 251, facing the lower part of the back of the play area forming body 80a, a recovery passage (not shown) is formed that corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning opening 81, the variable winning device 82, and the operating openings 83a and 83b and gathers in one place downstream. As a result, all game balls that win the general winning opening 81 etc. are configured to collect below the game board unit 80 via the recovery passage. In other words, the base body 251 is given the function of recovering game balls that win in various winning openings.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is provided below the game board unit 80, and game balls that have gathered below the game board unit 80 are led into the discharge passage by the recovery passage. The outlet 89 also leads to the discharge passage, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are led into the discharge passage via the outlet 89.

The base body 251 constituting the rear block 80b is also equipped with detection sensors for each of the ball entry sections described above, including a general entry port detection sensor that detects game balls that have entered the general entry port 81, and an operating port detection sensor that detects game balls that have entered the operating ports 83a and 83b, and these various detection sensors form a winning detection mechanism. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and each detection sensor outputs detection information (detection signal) to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to Figures 9 and 10. Figure 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 has a back pack 201 as the main body of the back pack unit 15, and a dispensing mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage panel and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 10, comprises a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a generally rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 is closed on the left and right sides and the top, and only the bottom is open, and is large enough to at least surround the variable display unit 252 (see FIG. 9).

An external output terminal board 213 is provided on the top of the base 211. The external output terminal board 213 has various output terminals, which are connected to wiring WH1 that connects the gaming hall's management control device (hall computer HC) and the pachinko machine 10. Various signals output from the external output terminal board 213 (output terminals) of the pachinko machine 10 are transmitted to the hall computer HC via wiring WH1, and the hall computer HC is configured to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the game situation based on these various signals.

As shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latch pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably relative to the inner frame 13 by inserting the latch pins 214 into the bearing portion 133 provided on the inner frame 13. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixing levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted, and the back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by abutting the base portion 211 from behind with the fixing levers 134 inserted into the insertion portions.

The payout mechanism 202 is disposed on the base 211 so as to bypass the protective cover 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is disposed on the top of the back pack 201 and opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 221. A tank rail 222 that gently slopes toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to a game ball distribution section 225 provided on the base 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided downstream of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution section 225 has the function of distributing the game balls dispensed from the payout device 224 to either the upper tray 33, the lower tray 34, or the discharge passage described below, and is formed so that its inner opening leads to the upper tray 33 via the above-mentioned main body side upper tray passage 122 and front door side upper tray passage, and its outer opening leads to the lower tray 34 via the main body side lower tray passage 123 and front door side lower tray passage.

The discharge passage panel and control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end from the front and rear. A discharge passage that is open to the rear is formed on the surface of the discharge passage panel facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open part of the discharge passage is blocked by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls led to the discharge passage from the above-mentioned collection passage etc. are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, on which a payout control device 242 and a power supply/launch control device 243 are mounted. The payout control device 242 and the power supply/launch control device 243 are stacked one behind the other so that the payout control device 242 is at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board that controls the payout device 224 is housed in a board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board protrudes outside the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed in the event of a payout error, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam is cleared.

The power supply/launch control device 243 has a power supply/launch control board housed in a board box 246. The power supply/launch control board generates and outputs the specified power required by various control devices, etc., and also controls the launch of game balls in response to the player's operation of the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, it controls the drive of the solenoid 111 that constitutes the game ball launch mechanism 110 and the drive of the ball sending device 113.

The power supply/launch control device 243 is also provided with a power supply switch 247. By operating the power supply switch 247, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (ON state) and a cut-off state (OFF state).

The pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing various data, so that in the unlikely event of a power outage, the state at the time of the power outage is retained, and when the power returns, the state at the time of the power outage can be restored. For example, if the power is cut off in the normal manner, such as when an amusement parlor closes, the state before the power outage is stored and retained. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166 on the main control unit 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front of the gaming machine by opening the main machine part 12 (inner frame 13) and exposing the back of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the opening of the main machine part 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front of the gaming machine. In other words, the various switches are difficult to operate when the main machine part 12 is closed, making it difficult for someone who does not have a key for the locking device 75 (e.g., a fraudster) to operate them from the front of the gaming machine.

(Electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main control board 401 provided in the main control device 162 is equipped with an MPU 402. The MPU 402 is an element that incorporates a ROM 403 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 402, a RAM 404 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 403, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as random number generators, etc. Note that some of the functions of the MPU 402, such as the functions of the ROM 403 and the RAM 404, may be configured to be provided as separate elements.

The MPU 402 has an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 402 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 405 provided in the main control unit 162, a dispensing control unit 242, various detection sensors, and the like. The power outage monitoring board 405 is connected to the power supply and launch control unit 243, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power outage monitoring board 405.

As part of the various detection sensors, a ball entry detection sensor 391a that detects balls (winning) entering the general winning port 81, a ball entry detection sensor 391b that detects balls (winning) entering the variable winning device 82, a ball entry detection sensor 391c that detects balls (winning) entering the upper operating port 83a, a ball entry detection sensor 391d that detects balls (winning) entering the lower operating port 83b, and a ball entry detection sensor 391e that detects balls (winning) entering the through gate 84 are connected, and the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 judges whether a ball has entered each entry section (ball entry judgment). In addition, the MPU 402 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot based on winning entries into the upper operating port 83a and the lower operating port 83b, and executes a lottery for generating a support based on winning entries into the through gate 84.

The output side of the MPU 402 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 405, the payout control device 242, and the notification/presentation control device 140. The payout control device 242 outputs a prize ball command based on the winning judgment result for the winning ball entry section such as the above-mentioned operation port 83a, 83b, etc. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced. Then, when a win is identified in the general winning port 81, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, when a win is identified in the variable winning device 82, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output, when a win is identified in the upper operation port 83a, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is output, and when a win is identified in the lower operation port 83b, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 4 game balls is output.

Various commands, such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command, are output from the main control device 162 to the notification and performance control device 140. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referenced. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Each of the above commands is configured as a predetermined number of bytes of information, and various information is included as the predetermined number of bytes of information.

Also, the output side of the MPU 402 is connected to a variable winning drive section that opens and closes the opening and closing body (e.g., shutter member 88) of the variable winning device 82, an electric role drive section that opens and closes the electric role 91 of the lower operating port 83b, and the main display unit 87. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 401, and the MPU 402 controls the drive of the various drive sections through these driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 402 controls the driving of the variable winning drive unit so that the variable winning device 82 opens and closes. Also, if the support lottery for the electric role device 91 is won, the MPU 402 controls the driving of the electric role device drive unit so that the electric role device 91 opens and closes. Also, the MPU 402 controls the display of the main display section D of the main display unit 87.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402, and information on ball entry into various entry areas and lottery results such as jackpots are output via this external output terminal board 213 to the management and control device (hall computer HC) on the gaming hall side. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10, the game situation, etc.

The power failure monitoring board 405 relays between the main control board 401 and the power supply/launch control device 243, and is provided with the function of monitoring the stable DC voltage of 24 V, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 243. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply and launch control device 243 is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in, for example, an amusement facility. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates the operating power required for the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc., and supplies the generated operating power through a specified power path. The power supply and launch control device 243 is also responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 110, which is driven when specified launch conditions are met.

The notification/performance control device 140 is provided with a notification/performance control board equipped with an MPU. The MPU has a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, a RAM that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM and RAM are integrated into a single chip for the MPU, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. The MPU of the notification/performance control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 installed in the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also controls the display control device 410.

The display control device 410 executes display control of the pattern display device 253 based on commands input from the notification/performance control device 140. In this case, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the variable display mode of the patterns on the pattern display device 253 (for example, whether or not a reach has occurred and the contents of the reach performance, etc.) and the stopped display mode of the patterns (the type of pattern combination that will finally be stopped when the variable display ends) based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

Here, the configuration related to the changing display of the patterns for each game round and the contents of the changing display will be explained. In the following explanation, reference will be made to Figures 12 and 13 as appropriate. Figures 12 and 13 are schematic diagrams for explaining the display contents on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, and for ease of explanation, the background image etc. displayed on the display screen 253a has been omitted.

The display control device 410 is provided with a character ROM. The character ROM prestores data for nine main patterns numbered "1" to "9" (see Figs. 12(a) to (i)) and data for sub-patterns not numbered (see Fig. 12(j)).

As shown in FIG. 13(a), three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, which are an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each pattern row Z1 to Z3 is configured with main patterns and sub-patterns arranged in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 253a, the patterns of each of these pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed variably, scrolling periodically in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left).

In the upper pattern row Z1, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In the lower pattern row Z3, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with one sub-pattern between each main pattern. In other words, the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are composed of 18 patterns. In contrast, in the middle pattern row Z2, nine main patterns from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, with a main pattern of "4" additionally arranged between the main pattern of "9" and the main pattern of "1", with one sub-pattern between each of these main patterns. In other words, the middle pattern row Z2 alone is composed of 20 patterns, with 10 main patterns arranged.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), the display screen 253a is designed to display three symbols per symbol row, resulting in a total of nine symbols being displayed in a 3×3 fashion. Five active lines, namely the left line L1, the middle line L2, the right line L3, the downward-right line L4, and the upward-right line L5, are set on the display screen 253a. The display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. If the display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 ends with a predetermined symbol combination (e.g., a symbol combination with the same number) being formed on any of the active lines, a jackpot video is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a guaranteed jackpot result.

In light of the fact that the variable display of each pattern row is stopped as described above, the upper pattern row Z1 can be called the first pattern row (or first picture row), the lower pattern row Z3 can be called the second pattern row (or second picture row), and the middle pattern row Z2 can be called the third pattern row (or third picture row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols". When a special jackpot result is achieved, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is displayed as a stopped symbol. When a normal jackpot result is achieved, the same non-specific symbol combination is displayed as a stopped symbol.

The manner in which the pattern display device 253 changes the patterns is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the changing pattern display in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. For example, multiple pattern rows can be set to be arranged horizontally, and the direction of the changing pattern display in the pattern rows can be set to be vertical.

A reserve display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 253a, specifically below the variable display area ME, which is composed of a variable display area for the upper pattern row, a variable display area for the middle pattern row, and a variable display area for the lower pattern row. The reserve display area is composed of a reserve number display area Da for the upper operation port, which is displayed in a partitioned manner so that the unit reserve display area is aligned in the left-right direction in the same number as the maximum number of reserved balls when the game ball enters the upper operation port 83a, and which can display the same number of reserved images as the reserved information related to the upper operation port 83a in the unit display area, a reserve number display area Db for the lower operation port, which is displayed in a partitioned manner so that the unit reserve display area is aligned in the left-right direction in the same number as the maximum number of reserved balls when the game ball enters the lower operation port 83b, and which can display the same number of reserved images as the reserved information related to the lower operation port 83b in the unit display area, and an execution target display area in which a reserve image corresponding to the game round being executed in the variable display area ME can be displayed.

More specifically, when a game ball enters the upper operating port 83a, the maximum number of reserved balls is four, and corresponding to this, the reserved number display area Da for the upper operating port is set to a first unit reserved display area, a second unit reserved display area, a third unit reserved display area, and a fourth unit reserved display area. Also, when a game ball enters the lower operating port 83b, the maximum number of reserved balls is four, and corresponding to this, the reserved number display area Db for the lower operating port is set to a first unit reserved display area, a second unit reserved display area, a third unit reserved display area, and a fourth unit reserved display area.

For example, if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a is one, a predetermined reserved image is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area, and if the number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a is four, a predetermined reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area to the fourth unit reserved display area. Figure 11(b) illustrates an example in which the number of reserved balls in the upper actuation port 83a is three, and the number of reserved balls in the lower actuation port 83b is two. In the following explanation, "reserved number" is also simply referred to as "reserved number".

(Regarding various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 402 uses various counter information during play to perform a lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, settings for the display of the main display unit 87 (main display section D), and settings for the display of the pattern display device 253. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, the MPU 402 uses a winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, a winning type counter C2 used for determining the type of jackpot such as a guaranteed winning result or a normal winning result, a reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when the pattern display device 253 misses and changes, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS that determines the display time of the changing pattern on the operation port display section UD, LD of the main display unit 87 and the display time of the changing pattern on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 (the performance execution time including the temporary stop time described later). In addition, the MPU 402 uses an electric role release counter C4 used for the lottery for whether or not the electric role 91 of the lower operation port 83b is in an electric role release state.

Each counter C1-C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 431 set in a specified area of RAM 404. RAM 404 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 432 consisting of a reserved area Ra for the upper operating port, a reserved area Rb for the lower operating port, an execution area AE, and a total reserved number storage area.

The reserved ball storage area 432 includes a reserved area consisting of an upper actuation port reserved area Ra and a lower actuation port reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. Each reserved area Ra, Rb includes a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 according to the winning history of the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b is stored in one of the first area to the fourth area as the reserved information described above. Note that the reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, when multiple consecutive wins occur at the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b, the first to fourth areas store the numerical information in chronological order from the first area to the second area to the third area to the fourth area. By providing four areas in this way, up to four winning balls at the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b can be reserved and stored. In addition, the reserved ball storage area 432 is provided with a total reserved number storage area, which stores information for specifying the number of winning balls at the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b that are reserved and stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving the values stored in the first area of the reserve area when the display of changing patterns begins on the operation port display sections UD and LD of the main display unit 87, and when one game round begins, a win/loss determination is made based on the various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Regarding each counter in detail, the winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 when the game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 404 when the game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a, and is stored in the lower actuation port reserved area Rb of the RAM 404 when the game ball enters the lower actuation port 83b.

The random number value that results in a jackpot win is stored as a win/lose table (win/lose information group) in a win/lose table storage area 421, which serves as a win/lose information group storage means in ROM 403. As shown in FIG. 15, a win/lose table for the low probability mode (win/lose information group for low probability) and a win/lose table for the high probability mode (win/lose information group for high probability) are set as the win/lose table. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the win/lose lottery selection means.

In a game state where the winning/losing table for the low probability mode (Figure 15(a)) is referenced in the above lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are three: "7", "307", and "507". In other words, of the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the jackpot result. On the other hand, in a game state where the winning/losing table for the high probability mode (Figure 15(b)) is referenced in the above lottery, the random number values (i.e., winning information) that result in a jackpot are 30: "7", "36", "107", "307", ... "407", "507", and "598". In other words, out of the winning random number counter C1 values of "0 to 599", "7", "36", "107", "307" ... "407", "507", and "598" correspond to the jackpot result. Incidentally, as long as the winning probability is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary.

In addition, in each lottery mode, any random number value other than the jackpot winning value will result in a losing lottery result.

The winning type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to 0 after it reaches the maximum value (i.e., 29). In this embodiment, multiple jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results have differences in two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode by the electric role 91 after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

The support modes for the electric device 91 attached to the lower operating port 83b are set to a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and a high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) so that the frequency with which the electric device 91 of the lower operating port 83b opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously released in a similar manner into the play area PE.

Specifically, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role opening lottery using the electric role opening counter C4, but in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric role 91 is in the open state when the electric role opening state is won is set to be greater than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time for one time is set to be longer. In this case, when the electric role opening state is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role 91 is in the open state multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum time to be secured between one electric role opening lottery and the next electric role opening lottery is set to be shorter than in the low-frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the lower actuation port 83b is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the upper actuation port 83a is higher than in the lower actuation port 83b, but in the high frequency support mode, the probability of a winning entry into the lower actuation port 83b is higher than in the upper actuation port 83a. And when a winning entry into the lower actuation port 83b occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player can play without losing too many balls.

The specific configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequently than the low-frequency support mode in the electric role open state per unit time is not limited to the above, and may be, for example, a configuration for increasing the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric role open lottery. Furthermore, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode may be set by making any one or any combination of the conditions of the number of times, open time, and winning probability different.

The winning type counter C2 is updated periodically, and the game ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 when it enters the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the upper actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 404 when it enters the upper actuation port 83a, and is stored in the lower actuation port reserved area Rb of the RAM 404 when it enters the lower actuation port 83b.

The allocation destination of the game result for the winning type counter C2 is stored as an allocation table (allocation information group) in the allocation table storage area 422, which serves as an allocation information group storage means in the ROM 403. The contents of the allocation table will now be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 16. As the allocation table, an allocation table (first allocation information group) for the upper operating port shown in FIG. 16(a) and an allocation table (second allocation information group) for the lower operating port shown in FIG. 16(b) are set.

In the distribution table for the upper operation port, the following are set as distribution destinations for game results: 8R special jackpot result (high probability special game result), 8R normal jackpot result (low probability special game result), 4R special jackpot result (high probability game result), and 4R normal jackpot result (low probability game result). Specifically, in the distribution table for the upper operation port, of the hit type counter C2 values of "0 to 29", "0 to 8" corresponds to an 8R special jackpot result, "9 to 14" corresponds to an 8R normal jackpot result, "15 to 23" corresponds to a 4R special jackpot result, and "24 to 29" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result.

In the distribution table for the lower operation port, the following are set as distribution destinations for game results: 16R special jackpot result (high probability special game result), 8R special jackpot result (high probability special game result), 8R normal jackpot result (low probability special game result), 4R special jackpot result (high probability game result), 4R normal jackpot result (low probability game result). Specifically, in the distribution table for the lower operation port, of the hit type counter C2 values of "0-29", "0-5" corresponds to a 16R special jackpot result, "6-11" corresponds to an 8R special jackpot result, "12-17" corresponds to an 8R normal jackpot result, "18-23" corresponds to a 4R special jackpot result, and "24-29" corresponds to a 4R normal jackpot result.

The 16R, 8R, and 4R probability variable jackpot results are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the open/close execution mode ends. As shown in FIG. 16(c), this high frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result occurs, and transitions to the low frequency support mode with the start of the open/close execution mode.

The 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result are jackpot results in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the end of the open/close execution mode. However, as shown in FIG. 16(c), this high frequency support mode ends when the number of games played during the high frequency support mode reaches the end reference number or when a jackpot result occurs before the end reference number is reached (more specifically, when the open/close execution mode is started), and the mode transitions to the low frequency support mode. The end reference number is set to one of five values: 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, and 100 times. In this embodiment, the end reference number is not made clear and the end timing of the high frequency support mode is hidden, making it difficult to identify how long the high frequency support mode will continue. This is a device to suppress monotony of the game in the high frequency support mode.

Incidentally, as described above, in some cases where a special jackpot result is obtained, the same symbol combination as in a normal jackpot result is displayed as a final stop (confirmed display) on the display screen 253a, making it difficult to distinguish whether the result was normal or special jackpot. However, if the high frequency support mode continues for more than 100 times, it becomes clear from the behavior of the electric role 91 that the player is in the high frequency support mode based on the special jackpot result.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 when the game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b. More specifically, it is stored in the upper actuation port reserved area Ra of the RAM 404 when the game ball enters the upper actuation port 83a, and is stored in the lower actuation port reserved area Rb of the RAM 404 when the game ball enters the lower actuation port 83b. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate a reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403.

However, in a game that transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines whether a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually for each game state. For example, a configuration may be used in which the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of a reach display is set to be greater when the support mode is a high frequency support mode than when it is a low frequency support mode.

Here, the term "reach display" (reach state) refers to a display state that makes the player believe that the game machine is in a state where the stop display result after the variable display is likely to be a special display result after the variable display has started and before the stop display result is derived and displayed, in a game machine that has a pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) capable of displaying a variable (or changeable) pattern (picture), and in which the stop display result after the variable display can be a special display result in a game round where the game result corresponds to the open/close execution mode.

In other words, it is a display state in which the patterns of some of the multiple pattern rows displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 are stopped to display a reach pattern combination that may result in a pattern combination corresponding to the occurrence of the open/close execution mode, and in this state, the patterns of the remaining pattern rows are displayed in a variable manner.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to terminating the display of changing patterns, a reach line is formed by displaying a stopped reach pattern combination that has the potential to form a pattern combination corresponding to the occurrence of an open/close execution mode on a preset effective line in the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, and while the reach line is formed, the display of changing patterns is performed using the final stopped pattern sequence.

To explain the display contents on the display screen 253a in more detail, first the display of the changing patterns in the upper pattern row is terminated, and then when the display of the changing patterns in the lower pattern row is terminated, a reach line is formed by the main patterns with numbers attached that make up the winning pattern combination being displayed stationary on one of the active lines, and when the reach line is formed, the display of changing patterns in the middle pattern row is performed, resulting in a reach display. Then, when a jackpot occurs, the display of changing patterns in the middle pattern row is terminated by causing the main patterns that form the reach line and the main patterns with numbers attached that make up the winning pattern combination to be displayed stationary on the reach line.

The reach display also includes a reach effect in which, while the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are changed and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, and a reach effect is performed by reducing the reach symbol combination or making it non-displayable and then displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 253a. In addition, when the reach display is being performed or before the reach display, the decision of whether or not to perform a preview display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character may be made using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter.

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The fluctuation type counter CS is used by the MPU 402 to determine the fluctuation display time in the upper and lower operating port display sections of the main display unit 87 (main display section D) and the fluctuation display time of the pattern in the pattern display device 253. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained when determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation display in the upper and lower operating port display sections and at the start of the pattern fluctuation by the pattern display device 253.

The electric role opening counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 250, and to return to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 250). The electric role opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric role reserve area 433 of the RAM 404 when a game ball enters the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not the electric role 91 of the lower operating port 83b should be controlled to an open state, based on the stored value of the electric role opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric role 91 is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric role 91 is not controlled to an open state.

As already explained, the MPU 402 uses at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS to determine the variation display time in the upper operation port display section and the lower operation port display section, and uses the variation display time table storage area 423 in the ROM 403 when making this determination. Also, the MPU 402 uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop result in the upper operation port display section and the lower operation port display section, and uses the stop result table storage area 424 in the ROM 403 when making this determination.

(Regarding various processes executed by the main control device 162)
Next, a description will be given of the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed in the progress of the game by the MPU 402 in the main control device 162. In addition to the timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 402 also executes main processing that is started when the power is turned on and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of these various types of processing will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 17. This process is started by the MPU 402 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, a process of reading various winning detection sensors (e.g., the above-mentioned detection sensors 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, the state of the various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the winning detection sensors is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Then, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the next step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role opening counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values, they are each cleared to 0. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the next step S104, a winning process for through is executed in response to a win at the through gate 84. In the winning process for through, it is determined whether or not a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and if the flag is stored, the value of the electric role release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric role reserve area, provided that the number of reserved roles stored in the electric role reserve area 433 is less than 4. Then, if a winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage area 435, the winning detection flag is erased and the winning process for the through gate is terminated.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, where the winning process for the actuation port associated with the winning at actuation port 83a, 83b is executed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

(Winning process for the operating port)
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 18 and 19.

In step S201, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a (a prize). If it is determined that the game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command is set to cause the payout control device 242 to pay out three game balls.

In the next step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the upper operating port 83a to the hall computer HC in the game hall. This allows the hall computer HC to understand that a ball has entered the upper operating port 83a. In the next step S204, a value corresponding to the upper operating port 83a is read from the reserved number storage area, and this value is set as the start reserved memory number Ran reserved and stored in the reserved area Ra (hereinafter also referred to as the reserved memory number Ran for the upper operating port). Thereafter, in step S205, an information acquisition process is performed to store each value of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, etc., and this winning process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not entered the upper operating port 83a, the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, it is determined whether the game ball has entered (won) the lower operating port 83b. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b, the process proceeds to step S207, where a prize ball command is set to the payout control device 242 to pay out four game balls. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is sent to the payout control device 242 in the external output process S401 of the normal process described below.

In the next step S208, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the lower operating port 83b to the hall computer HC in the gaming hall. This allows the hall computer HC to understand that a ball has entered the lower operating port 83b. In the next step S209, a value corresponding to the lower operating port 83b is read from the reserved number storage area, and this value is set as the start reserved memory number RbN reserved and stored in the reserved area Rb (hereinafter also referred to as the reserved memory number RbN for the lower operating port). Thereafter, in step S205, an information acquisition process is performed to store the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, etc., and this winning process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in both steps S201 and S206, i.e., if no ball has entered either the upper operating port 83a or the lower operating port 83b, the winning process ends.

Here, the information acquisition process of step S205 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Information Acquisition Processing)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether the number of activated pending memories N stored in the reserved number storage area of the reserved ball storage area 432, specifically, the number of activated pending memories N (RaN or RbN) related to the ball entry section that triggered the information acquisition process among the upper actuation port 83a and the lower actuation port 83b, is less than the upper limit (in this embodiment, "4"). If the number of activated pending memories N is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as is, and if it is less than the upper limit, in step S302, the number of activated pending memories N of the corresponding actuation port is incremented by 1, and in step S303, the total number of reserved memories stored in the reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) is incremented by 1.

In the following step S304, the values of the winning random number counter C1, winning type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS updated in the above step S103 are stored in the first memory area among the free memory areas of the holding area RE for the operating port, that is, the memory area corresponding to the common holding number CRN incremented by 1 in the above step S302.

In other words, when the start pending memory number RaN for the upper operating port is set, the values of the hit random number counter C1, hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and change type counter CS updated in step S103 are stored in the first free memory area of the reserve area Ra for the upper operating port, that is, the reserve area Ra corresponding to the start pending memory number RaN for the upper operating port incremented by 1 in step S302.

In addition, if the start pending memory number RbN for the lower operating port is set, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 above are stored in the first free memory area of the reserve area Rb for the lower operating port, that is, the reserve area Rb corresponding to the start pending memory number RbN for the lower operating port incremented by 1 in step S302 above.

After storing the reserved information, proceed to step S305. In step S305, a display update process is executed for the reserved number display section of the main display unit 87. In the display update process, if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the upper operating port 83a, the display of the reserved number display section for the upper operating port is updated, and if the current ball entry destination (winning destination) is the lower operating port 83b, the display of the reserved number display section for the lower operating port is updated.

Each reserved number display section is made up of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit in the reserved number display section matches the reserved number related to the upper actuation port 83a and the reserved number related to the lower actuation port 83b. If the reserved number related to the upper actuation port 83a increases as a result of the current win, the number of lit LEDs in the reserved number display section for the upper actuation port is increased accordingly, and if the reserved number related to the lower actuation port 83b increases, the number of lit LEDs in the reserved number display section for the lower actuation port is increased accordingly.

In the following steps S306 and S307, the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410, which are the sub-side (auxiliary) control devices, are made to recognize that a win has occurred in the actuation ports 83a and 83b, and a confirmation process for the hold notice and a process for setting a hold command, which are processes for executing the hold notice described below, are executed, and this information acquisition process is terminated. Note that the hold command includes information as to whether the win is based on the upper actuation port 83a or the lower actuation port 83b.

The pending command set in the pending command setting process in step S307 will be transmitted to the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described below.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 20. Normal processing is processing that starts after main processing that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. In summary, the processing of steps S401 to S406 is executed as regular processing with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S408 and S409 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, in step S401, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output processing in step S401, output data such as timer interrupt processing or commands set in the previous normal processing is sent to each control device on the sub side and the hall computer HC.

Specifically, it determines whether or not there is a prize ball command, and if a prize ball command is set, it sends it to the payout control device 242. In addition, if various commands are set, such as performance commands such as a fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command, hold command, and shift command described below, it sends them to the notification/performance control device 140.

Moreover, although details will be described later, for example, each time the display of the changing patterns is completed on the operation port display sections UD and LD of the main display section D, an external signal indicating that the pattern has been confirmed is output to the hall computer HC, and when in the opening/closing execution mode, an external signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in is output to the hall computer HC, and when in the high frequency support mode, an external signal indicating that the high frequency support mode is in is output to the hall computer HC.

Next, in step S402, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 404.

In the next step S403, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. This game round control process performs a jackpot determination, sets the variable display of the patterns by the pattern display device 253, and controls the display of the main display unit 87.

After executing the game count control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, where the game state transition process is executed. Details will be described later, but this game state transition process transitions the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game count control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the next step S405, an electric role support process is executed to drive and control the electric role 91 attached to the lower operating port 83b. In this electric role support process, an electric role opening lottery is executed to determine whether or not the electric role 91 is opened using numerical information acquired from the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role reservation area 433 of the RAM 404, and if the electric role opening state is selected, the opening and closing process of the electric role 91 is executed. In addition, display control of the through gate display unit in the main display unit D is performed to inform the result of the electric role opening lottery.

As already explained, the support provided by the electric device 91 can be set to a low-frequency support mode or a high-frequency support mode, and a transition to one of the support modes is made during game state transition processing. If a high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 after this processing, the high-frequency support mode is selected, and if the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is selected.

In the electric role support process, whether or not the high frequency support mode is selected is determined by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric role device 91 opens when the electric role open state is selected is set to be greater than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time for each opening is set to be longer than in the low frequency support mode. Also, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric role open state is selected and the electric role device 91 opens multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is set to be shorter than the opening time for each opening.

Incidentally, when switching to the opening/closing execution mode, even if the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the support mode is forcibly set to the low-frequency support mode.

After that, in step S406, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is excited once every predetermined interval period (e.g., 0.6 sec), provided that a launch permission signal has been input from the power supply/launch control device 243. This causes the game ball to be launched toward the play area PE.

In the next step S407, it is determined whether the next execution timing of normal processing has arrived, i.e., whether one period (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, during the remaining time until the next execution timing of normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 404. In addition, in step S409, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is then stored in the corresponding area of RAM 404.

The execution time of each process in steps S401 to S406 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and the variation type counter CS can also be randomly updated in the same way.

(Game play control process)
Next, the game play control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 21 to FIG.

First, in the game round control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is in the open/close execution mode, the game round control process ends without executing any of the processes from step S502 onwards, i.e., the game round start process in steps S503 to S505 and the game round progress process in steps S506 to S509.

If the opening/closing execution mode is not in effect, then in step S502 it is determined whether a game round is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the operating port display sections UD and LD of the main display unit 87 are displaying a variable or fixed value. If a game round is not in progress, the process proceeds to steps S503 to S505 for processing to start a game round. In the process to start a game round, first in step S503 it is determined whether the total number of start reserved balls (common reserved number CRN) is "0". If the common reserved number CRN is "0", this means that no reserved information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 432. Therefore, the game round control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the common reserved number CRN is not "0", in step S504, a data setting process is executed to set the data stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 432 for variable display, and in step S505, a variable start process is executed to start the variable display of the operating port display section in the main display unit 87 and the variable display of the pattern display device 253, and then this game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 22.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, the activation pending memory count N stored in the pending number storage area, which is the target of the current setting process, and the common pending count CRN are decremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the number of pending information stored in the lower actuation port pending area Rb (see FIG. 14), i.e., the activation pending memory count N (lower actuation port pending memory count RbN), is "0" or not. If the lower actuation port pending memory count RbN is "0", data setting process related to the upper actuation port display unit UD is executed, and if the lower actuation port pending memory count RbN is not "0", data setting process related to the lower actuation port display unit LD is executed.

Here, as already explained, the data setting process is executed when the common hold number is 1 or more. In this case, the data setting process determines whether the hold memory number RbN for the lower actuation port is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", that is, if hold information for variable display is stored for the display unit LD for the lower actuation port, the data stored in the hold area Rb for the lower actuation port is moved to the execution area AE for variable display, regardless of whether the number of hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the upper actuation port (see FIG. 14), that is, the operation hold memory number N (hold memory number RaN for the upper actuation port), is 1 or more. In other words, in step S602, if hold information is stored in both the hold area Ra for the upper actuation port and the hold area Rb for the lower actuation port, the hold information corresponding to the lower actuation port 83b is given priority.

In the next step S603, for either the upper operating port reserve area Ra or the lower operating port reserve area Rb in which the data moved to the execution area AE was stored, the data stored in the first to fourth areas is shifted sequentially to the lower area side. As a result, for example, as the data in the first area is moved to the execution area AE, the data in each area is shifted from the second area to the first area, the third area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on.

In the following step S604, a shift command is set, which is information for making the notification/performance control device 140 recognize that a data shift has been made for the reserved areas Ra and Rb. Then, this data setting process ends. The shift command set in step S604 is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). This shift command is then sent to the display control device 410 via the notification/performance control device 140.

(Change start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the variation start process, first, in step S701, a win/loss determination process is executed to determine whether the reserved information referenced in the current variation start process corresponds to a jackpot win. Specifically, information for jackpot determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, i.e., information obtained from the win random number counter C1, is grasped. Then, if the win/loss lottery mode is the low probability mode, the win/loss table for the low probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine whether the grasped information is included in information corresponding to a jackpot win, and if the win/loss lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/loss table for the high probability mode stored in the win/loss table storage area 421 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine whether the grasped information is included in information corresponding to a jackpot win.

In the next step S702, it is determined whether the result of the win/lose determination process in step S701 corresponds to a jackpot win. If the result corresponds to a jackpot win, the type determination process is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, the type determination information from the information stored in the execution area AE, i.e., the information obtained from the winning type counter C2, is identified. In addition, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of the ROM 403 is referenced to determine whether the above-identified type determination information is included in the information corresponding to the guaranteed jackpot result. In more detail, if the reserved information corresponds to a ball entering the upper operating port 83a, the distribution table for the upper operating port 83a is referenced, and if the reserved information corresponds to a ball entering the lower operating port 83b, the distribution table for the lower operating port 83b is referenced to determine the type.

In the following step S704, it is determined whether the type of the current jackpot win is a special jackpot result (16R special jackpot result, 8R special jackpot result, 4R special jackpot result) based on the information identified in the type determination process in step S703. If it is a special jackpot result, the stop result setting process for a special jackpot is executed in step S705, and if it is not a special jackpot result, the stop result setting process for a normal jackpot is executed in step S706. Also, if it is determined in step S702 that the jackpot win is not a win, the stop result setting process for a miss is executed in step S707.

The special jackpot results are broadly divided into 16R special jackpot results, 8R special jackpot results, and 4R special jackpot results. In the process of step S705, in the case of a 16R special jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 16R special jackpot result is performed, in the case of an 8R special jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R special jackpot result is performed, and in the case of a 4R special jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 4R special jackpot result is performed. In addition, the normal jackpot results are broadly divided into 8R normal jackpot results and 4R normal jackpot results. In the process of step S706, in the case of an 8R normal jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 8R normal jackpot result is performed, and in the case of a 4R normal jackpot result, a stop result setting process corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot result is performed.

In each stop result setting process from step S705 to step S707, the information on the type of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 87 is specified by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 404. In addition, in steps S705 and S706, information for the MPU 402 to specify that the win/loss determination result of the current game round is a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S705, either a 16R special jackpot flag, an 8R special jackpot flag, or a 4R special jackpot flag is stored, and in step S706, either an 8R normal jackpot flag or a 4R normal jackpot flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes in steps S705 to S707, the process for setting the variable display time is executed in step S708.

(Setting process for variable display time)
In the process of setting the variable display time, as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 24(a), first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning/losing lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R variable probability jackpot flag, the 8R variable probability jackpot flag, the 4R variable probability jackpot flag, the 8R normal jackpot flag, and the 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404.

If a negative judgment is made in step S801, that is, if the result of the win/lose lottery is a loss, the process proceeds to step S802. In step S802, it is judged whether or not a reach display will occur on the pattern display device 253 in the current game round. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, a positive judgment is made in step S802, indicating that a reach display has occurred. When determining whether or not a reach has occurred using the value of the reach random number counter C3, a reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area of the ROM 403 is referenced.

If a positive judgment is made in either step S801 or step S802, the process proceeds to step S803, where the variable display time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referenced to obtain variable display time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS, etc., and in the following step S804, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter in the variable display time counter area (variable display time measurement means) provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404. After that, this setting process is terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the win/lose lottery is a jackpot win, or when the result of the win/lose lottery is a loss and the lottery for reaching the reach is won.

Here, the reach display includes normal reach displays (more specifically, normal reach A to B) and super reach displays (more specifically, super reach A to C). The reach occurrence variable display time table has variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach displays and super reach displays set, and variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is obtained by referencing this table. Note that, with regard to determining the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variable type counter CS, and the reach display corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is determined by referencing this table.

More specifically, the variable display time table for reach occurrence corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, the variable display time is set so that a specific symbol combination can be statically displayed in the case of a guaranteed jackpot result, and the variable display time is set so that a non-specific symbol combination can be statically displayed in the case of a normal jackpot result.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S802, in step S805, the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 is referenced to obtain the variable display time corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS, and in step S806, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter in the variable display time counter area. After that, this setting process is terminated.

The variable display time when a reach does not occur is set to be shorter as the number of reserved information stored (common reserved number CRN) increases. Specifically, in the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence referenced during low-frequency support mode, it is specified that the number of reserved information stored (reserved number) is 1 sec when it is "4", 3 sec when it is "3", 5 sec or 7 sec when it is "2", 11 sec or 13 sec when it is "1", and 15 sec or 17 sec when it is "0" (see FIG. 24(b)). In contrast, in the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence referenced during high-frequency support mode, it is specified that the number of reserved information stored (reserved number) is 1 sec or 5 sec when it is "2" to "4", 2 sec or 5 sec when it is "1", and 5 sec or 8 sec when it is "0" (see FIG. 24(c)).

In the high-frequency support mode, the frequency of balls entering the lower operating port 83b increases due to support from the electric role 91, and as long as the game ball is launched to the right route, the number of pending information related to the lower operating port 83b will fluctuate between approximately "2" and "4". In contrast, in the low-frequency support mode, the pending information related to the upper operating port 83a is the main one, and the number of pending information will fluctuate between approximately "0" and "3". This differentiates the game progress in the high-frequency support mode so that it is faster than the game progress in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, while the fixed display time for the image is 2 seconds in the low-frequency support mode, the fixed display time for the image is set to 1 second in the high-frequency support mode, and the fixed display time is also shortened. This realizes even faster game progress.

When comparing a variable display time table for non-reach occurrence corresponding to the low-frequency support mode with a variable display time table for non-reach occurrence corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the variable display time in the high-frequency support mode is set to be shorter overall. When the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is referenced, 5 seconds is set at a predetermined rate (5% in this embodiment) regardless of the number of reserved balls. This is a measure to prevent excessive speeding up or monotony of game progress in the high-frequency support mode, and this variable display time is used in the pattern display device 253 to execute a branching performance (not compatible with reach display development) described later.

Incidentally, the configuration for setting the variable display time is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of common reserved numbers CRN, and may be set so that the smaller the number of common reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variable display time. In addition, the variable display time table for non-reach occurrence is set so that a shorter variable display time is selected in a situation where the support mode is a high-frequency support mode than in a situation where the support mode is a low-frequency support mode, when the number of reserved information is the same, but this is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when a reach occurs, and a configuration may be used in which the variable display time that is likely to be selected and the variable display time that is unlikely to be selected are different between a jackpot win and a miss reach. In addition, a configuration may be used in which the variable display time table for a sure-variable jackpot, the variable display time table for a normal jackpot, the variable display time table for a miss reach, and the variable display time table for a complete miss are each set individually.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 23), after the fluctuation display time setting process is executed in step S708, a fluctuation start command and a type command are set in step S709. The fluctuation start command includes information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. Furthermore, the type command includes information on the game result. In other words, the type command includes, as information on the game result, information on the 16R special jackpot result, information on the 8R special jackpot result, information on the 4R special jackpot result, information on the 8R normal jackpot result, information on the 4R normal jackpot result, information on the miss result, and the like.

The fluctuation start command and type command set in step S709 are sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 in normal processing (FIG. 20). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 29 for that game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and controls the lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 so that the determined content of the performance is executed. In addition, the notification/performance control device 140 determines the details of the game performance, such as the fluctuation display pattern of the pattern on the pattern display device 253 for that game round, based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and sends the determined information to the display control device 410 by adding it to the fluctuation start command and type command. The display control device 410 controls the display of the pattern display device 253 so that the game performance (display performance) is executed in the manner determined by the notification/performance control device 140 based on the received fluctuation start command and type command.

Then, in step S710, the display of the changing patterns is started on the corresponding one of the upper actuation port display section UD and the lower actuation port display section LD of the main display unit 87, and then this change start process is terminated. Note that it is also possible to configure the display of the changing patterns, etc. to start before the lottery is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process (FIG. 21), if the main display unit 87 is displaying a variable value, the game round progress process of steps S506 to S509 is executed. In the game round progress process, first in step S506, it is determined whether the variable display time for the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time counter (variable display time information) provided in the variable display time counter area of RAM 404 has become "0". As described above, this value is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 24). In addition, this set value is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S507. In the variable display process, the display mode of the corresponding one of the upper operating port display section UD and the lower operating port display section LD of the main display unit 87 is changed. After that, this game number control process is terminated.

If the change display time has elapsed, a change end process is executed in step S508. In the change end process, the information stored in RAM 404 in any of the processes in steps S705 to S707 above is identified, and the corresponding operating port display unit is controlled so that the picture corresponding to that information is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the corresponding one of the upper operating port display unit UD and the lower operating port display unit LD.

In the following step S509, a variation end command is set. After that, this game round control process is terminated. The variation end command set in step S509 is sent to the notification/presentation control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (Figure 20). The notification/presentation control device 140 sends the received variation end command to the display control device 410 while maintaining its information form. By receiving the variation end command, the display control device 410 displays the final stop pattern combination for that game round as confirmed (final stop display).

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode. If the game is not in the open/close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S902, where it is determined whether or not one game round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a preset stop display time (determined display time) has elapsed since the variable display ended on either of the operation port display sections UD and LD of the main display section D. If a positive determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S903, where it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game round (the result of the win/lose lottery) corresponds to the transition to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R special jackpot flag, 8R special jackpot flag, 4R special jackpot flag, 8R normal jackpot flag, and 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process ends as it is.

If any of the above flags are stored, the opening and closing execution mode start process is executed in step S904. This start process releases the operation restriction of the variable winning device 82 by the locking device, and the opening and closing operation of the variable winning device 82 is permitted until the opening and closing execution mode ends. In addition, in the start process of step S904, an opening and closing execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, and an external signal indicating that the opening and closing execution mode is in progress is started to be output to the hall computer HC of the game hall. In addition, in the above step S901, whether or not the opening and closing execution mode is in progress is determined based on the presence or absence of this opening and closing execution mode flag.

In the next step S905, the opening number counter OC provided in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to one of "4", "8", and "16". Specifically, if the 16R sure-win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the opening number counter OC is set to "16", if the 8R sure-win flag or the 8R normal win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the opening number counter OC is set to "8", and if the 4R sure-win flag or the 4R normal win flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the opening number counter OC is set to "4". The opening number counter OC functions as a means for grasping the number of times the variable winning device 82 has been opened. After executing the process of step S905, the process proceeds to step S506, where an opening command is set.

This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 20). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. The content of this performance includes the display mode of the pattern display device 253, and this determined display mode is output from the notification/performance control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. The display control device 410 executes display control of the pattern display device 253 so that a display corresponding to the current opening/closing execution mode, for example, a moving image of a character or the like as the display content corresponding to a big win, or a background image or the like is switched, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification/performance control device 140. After executing the processing of step S906, this game state transition processing is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S901, if it is determined in step S901 that the game is in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, it is determined whether the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the big prize opening opening process is executed in step S908.

In the large prize opening opening/closing process, first, it is determined whether the large prize opening of the variable prize device 82 is open or not. Specifically, this determination is made based on the drive state of the variable prize drive unit of the variable prize device 82. If the large prize opening is not open, it is determined whether the value of the opening number counter OC is "0". If the value of the opening number counter OC is "0", the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If the value of the opening count counter OC is not "0", it is determined whether the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0". The opening timer counter TC is a counter that is referenced when determining the opening and closing periods (interval periods) of the large prize opening, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 17) is executed. If the value of the opening timer counter TC is not "0", this large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated.

If the value of the opening count counter OC is not "0" and the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0", the opening process of the large prize opening is executed. Specifically, the variable prize drive unit is driven to open the large prize opening. After that, the setting process (opening setting process) for the closing condition corresponding to the variable prize winning device 82 (large prize opening) is executed. Specifically, the opening timer counter TC is set to "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec), and the winning counter PC is set to "10". After executing this setting process, an opening command indicating that the variable prize winning device 82 (large prize opening) has been opened is set, and the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set opening command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 20). The notification/performance control device 140 determines the content of the performance corresponding to the opening based on the reception of the opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the large prize opening of the variable prize winning device 82 is open, it is determined whether the value of the opening timer counter TC is "0". If the value of the opening timer counter TC is not "0", it is determined whether a game ball has entered the large prize opening based on the detection signal from the ball entry detection sensor 391c corresponding to the variable prize winning device 82. If no winning has occurred, the large prize opening opening/closing process is terminated.

If a win has occurred, the output process of the win command is executed. The win command is output to the payout control device 242 and the notification/presentation control device 140. The payout control device 242 executes a process of paying out a preset number of game balls based on the receipt of the win command. If a win command is issued during the opening/closing execution mode, the notification/presentation control device 140 executes a process of changing the presentation during the opening/closing execution mode executed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, for example, to indicate the win.

After executing the command output process, the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1, and then it is determined whether the value of the prize counter PC is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", the large prize opening opening process is terminated. If the value of the prize counter PC is "0", or if it is determined that the value of the open timer counter TC is "0", this means that the large prize opening closing condition has been met. In this case, the variable prize drive unit is deactivated to close the large prize opening.

Next, the opening number counter OC is updated. Specifically, if the value of the opening number counter OC is not "0", the opening number counter OC is decremented by 1, and if the value of the opening number counter OC is "0", the value of the opening number counter OC is maintained as "0". After that, it is determined whether the updated value of the opening number counter OC is "0".

If it is determined that the value of the opening count counter OC is not "0", the opening timer counter TC is set to "1000" (equivalent to 2.0 sec), a close command is set, and then the large prize opening opening and closing process is terminated. This set close command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (Figure 20). When the notification/performance control device 140 receives a close command, it determines the content of the performance corresponding to the close command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the opening number counter is "0", the process to start the ending is executed. In this process, a waiting time for the ending in the opening and closing execution mode is set so that the player can wait without starting the next round of play. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is pre-stored in the ROM 403, is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

Then, after setting the ending command, the main prize opening/closing process ends. This set ending command is sent to the notification/performance control device 140 in step S401 of the normal process (Figure 20).

Returning to the explanation of the game state transition process (FIG. 25), after the large prize opening opening process is executed in step S908, it is determined in step S909 whether the value of the opening number counter OC is "0" or not, and in step S910 it is determined whether the waiting time for the ending has elapsed or not. If the value of the opening number counter OC is not "0" or if the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, this game state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the opening number counter OC is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S911, the transition process at the end of the opening execution mode is executed.

In the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode, first, it is determined whether the jackpot result that triggered the current open/close execution mode was a 16R variable probability jackpot result, an 8R variable probability jackpot result, or a 4R variable probability jackpot result. Specifically, it is determined whether a 16R variable probability jackpot flag, an 8R variable probability jackpot flag, or a 4R variable probability jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404.

If the jackpot result that triggered the current open/close execution mode is a 16R variable probability jackpot result, an 8R variable probability jackpot result, or a 4R variable probability jackpot result, the flag related to the transition of the game state is erased. After the erasure process is executed, the game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, a high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of RAM 404. Based on the high probability mode flag set in this way, the win/lose table for the high probability mode will be referenced in the win/lose lottery for the subsequent game round.

Then, a high-frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode flag thus set, a win/lose table for the high-frequency support mode is referenced in the support lottery in the subsequent electric role support processing, the time for which the image changes during the support lottery is shortened (set to 2.0 seconds in detail), and the period during which the opening is maintained after one opening is extended (set to 5.0 seconds in detail).

On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggered the current open/close execution mode is an 8R normal jackpot result or a 4R normal jackpot result, i.e., if an 8R normal jackpot flag or a 4R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404, the flag related to the transition of the game state is erased. After the erasure process is executed, the game state setting process is executed. Specifically, first, the high frequency support mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high frequency support mode flag set in this way, the win/loss table for the high frequency support mode is referenced in the support lottery in the subsequent electric role support process, the time for displaying the variable image during the support lottery is shortened (specifically, set to 2.0 sec), and the period during which the open state is maintained after one opening is extended (specifically, set to 5.0 sec).

Unlike the case of the above-mentioned special jackpot result, an upper limit is set on the number of support times for the high-frequency support mode to which the mode transitions after the normal jackpot result. Specifically, the game play counter stored in the various counter area 434 of the RAM 404 is set to one of "10", "20", "30", "50", or "100". For the 8R normal jackpot result and the 4R normal jackpot result, 1/10 corresponds to the support number of "10", 1/10 corresponds to the support number of "20", 1/10 corresponds to the support number of "30", 2/10 corresponds to the support number of "50", and 5/10 corresponds to the support number of "100". The high-frequency support mode is maintained until the number of games played after the opening/closing execution mode ends reaches the upper limit, and when the set upper limit is reached, the support mode switches from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. In the following explanation, this upper limit is also called the end reference number.

After the game state setting process is performed, the open/close execution mode termination process is performed in step S912, and then the game state transition process is terminated. In this termination process, the open/close execution mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404 is erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the jackpot is stopped.

(Regarding the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of Figure 26, a supplementary explanation will be given of the electrical configuration of the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410.

The notification/performance control board 441 provided in the notification/performance control device 140 is equipped with an MPU 442. The MPU 442 has built-in ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, RAM 444 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 443, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 443 and RAM 444 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 442, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. This is also true for the MPUs of other control devices.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and receives game round control commands (game round control information) such as the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command from the main control device 162. It also receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and furthermore, opening and closing execution mode commands (opening and closing execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As already explained, the output side of the MPU 442 is connected to the lamp units 26-28 and speaker unit 29 provided in the front door frame 14, and the display control device 410. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification/performance control device 140 are sent to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information format.

The display control device 410 includes an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are integrated into a chip, a display control board 471 on which a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477 are mounted. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 473 and the work RAM 474 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 472, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification/performance control device 140, or performs predetermined calculation processing based on the various received commands, and controls the VDP 475 (specifically, generates internal commands for the VDP 475). In detail, the MPU 472 executes processing to identify the variable display pattern for each game round in the pattern display device 253 based on the commands sent from the notification/performance control device 140, and executes drawing processing for the VDP 475 in response to the processing results. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 472. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 472 executes various programs. This work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 474.

The VDP 475 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 253. The VDP 475 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and its actual form can be described as a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 475 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU 472, video RAM 477, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 477 from the character ROM 476 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 253.

The character ROM 476 serves as an image data library for storing various image data such as designs, character images, and background images displayed on the design display device 253. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 476 and have each character ROM 476 store different image data. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 476 to store JPEG format image data for background images stored in the program ROM 473.

Video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the pattern display device 253, and the display content of the pattern display device 253 is changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 477.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern on the display screen 253a is determined by the notification/performance control device 140 with reference to commands from the main control device 162, and the details of the display performance are determined by the display control device 410 based on the results. Specifically, the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 executes a variable display control process as part of periodic processing that is activated at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and this variable display control process determines the outline of the variable display mode of the pattern, etc. Here, the variable display control process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 27.

(Variable display control process)
In the variable display control process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not a game is being played, that is, whether or not one game's worth of pattern display (variable display, temporary stop display, or final stop display) is being executed on the pattern display device 253. If it is determined that a game is not being played, the process proceeds to step S1002, where it is determined whether or not a variable start command transmitted from the main control device 162 has been received.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1002, the variable display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S1002, the variable display control process is terminated after executing a process to start the variable in step S1003.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, if a positive judgment is made in step S1001, i.e., if it is judged that a game round is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1004. In step S1004, it is judged whether or not a fluctuation end command sent from the main control unit 162 has been received. If a negative judgment is made in step S1004, the fluctuation in progress processing is executed in step S1005, and then this fluctuation display control processing is terminated. The fluctuation in progress processing is a process for executing various effects and changing determined effects during the game round started by the fluctuation start processing.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1006, where a process for ending the variation is executed, and then this variation display control process is terminated. In the process for ending the variation, the pattern variation display and the currently being performed presentation are terminated in accordance with the pending information for the relevant game round (final stop display or confirmation display is performed). In this process, the speaker unit 29 and lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to perform a presentation corresponding to the confirmed stop. Then, a confirmation command is output to the display control device 410, and then this variation end process is terminated. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the pattern display device 253 to stop the confirmed pattern based on the received confirmation command.

(Processing for starting fluctuations)
Here, a supplementary explanation will be given on the fluctuation start processing of step S1003 with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 28. The fluctuation start processing is a processing for starting the performance for a game round based on receiving a fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S1101, the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and information on whether or not a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the command. Also, as already explained, when a fluctuation start command is sent from the main control device 162, a type command is also sent together. In step S1101, the type command received together with the currently received fluctuation start command is read, and information on the game result, such as information on the guaranteed jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, or information on the miss result, is identified from the command. Then, in step S1101, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the jackpot type if a jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if a jackpot has not been won, and information on the fluctuation display time are identified from the identified information, and the identified information is stored in a register of the MPU 442.

After executing the process of step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether or not the game is in a normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. If a positive determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, the process for the special presentation mode is executed. In this embodiment, a normal presentation mode and a special presentation mode are provided as presentation modes in a normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. The special presentation mode is a presentation mode that is configured to be entered when the number of games played in the normal presentation mode reaches a preset number (prescribed number of times) and to return to the normal presentation mode when a predetermined termination condition is met. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, a time-saving presentation mode is set as the presentation mode in a normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, and the presentation executed in the time-saving presentation mode is diverted in the special presentation mode. Here, the process for the special presentation mode will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 29.

(Special effect mode processing)
In the special presentation mode process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the special presentation mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special presentation mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, an update process is performed on the play count counter for the special presentation mode provided in the play count counter area 462 of the RAM 444. The play count counter for the special presentation mode is a counter for identifying the number of times a game has been played in the normal presentation mode.

After executing the update process in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, the value of the play count counter for the special presentation mode is referenced to determine whether the number of plays in the normal presentation mode has reached a preset number (prescribed number of plays). If a negative determination is made in step S1203, the process for the special presentation mode is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, a transition process to the special effect mode is performed. Specifically, the light-emitting state of the lamp unit 26 is switched to one corresponding to the special effect mode, and the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to one corresponding to the special effect mode. Then, a special effect mode start command is output to the display control device 410 to switch the background display state and the variable pattern display state on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 to a state corresponding to the special effect mode. After that, in step S1205, a special effect mode flag is set in the various flags storage area 466 of the RAM 444, and the special effect mode process is terminated. As a result of the special effect mode flag being set, a positive judgment is made in step S1201 thereafter.

Returning to the explanation of step S1201, if a positive judgment is made in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1206. In step S1206, a pseudo-fluctuation count counter provided in RAM 444 is referenced to judge whether or not the number of times that a pseudo-fluctuation (unit performance) described below has been executed has reached the lower limit of the termination reference number of times that can be set in the high frequency support mode (10 times in this embodiment). If a negative judgment is made in step S1206, the process for this special performance mode is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, a lottery process for continuing the special effect mode is executed. In other words, if the number of unit effects executed in the special effect mode reaches the lower limit, the possibility of continuing the special effect mode is determined by lottery.

If the lottery process in step S1207 results in continuation, a positive judgment is made in step S1208, and the processing for this special presentation mode is terminated. If the lottery process in step S1207 results in non-continuation, a negative judgment is made in step S1208, and the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, a special presentation mode end flag is set in the various flag storage area 466 of RAM 444. If this special presentation mode end flag is set, processing is performed to switch the presentation mode from special presentation mode to normal presentation mode at the end of the current game round.

Then, in step S1210, the process of resetting the specified number of times is executed, and the process for this special effect mode is terminated. There are multiple candidates for the specified number of times, and in the reset process, one of these candidates is selected by lottery. This configuration makes it possible to diversify the span from the end of a special effect mode to the transition to the next special effect mode.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start processing in FIG. 28, after executing the special effect mode processing in step S1103, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not a special effect mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. If a negative determination is made in step S1104, the process proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, the process of determining the effect for the normal effect mode is executed based on the information grasped in step S1101.

Specifically, if the game result of the game round starting this time is a game result corresponding to a jackpot result (i.e., a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result), a jackpot effect setting process is executed. In the jackpot effect setting process, the final stop result of the jackpot symbols is determined (final stop result determination process is performed). In the final stop result determination process, if the special jackpot result is a special jackpot result, the stop result in which a combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols marked with odd numbers) or a combination of non-specific symbols (main symbols marked with even numbers) is finally stopped and displayed on one active line L1-L5 is determined as the stop result for this game round. Also, if the result is a normal jackpot result, the stop result in which a combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols marked with even numbers) is finally stopped and displayed on one active line L1-L5 is determined as the final stop result for this game round.

The type of main pattern and the effective lines L1-L5 that are ultimately displayed when a jackpot result occurs are determined randomly by lottery or the like. The final stop line tables stored in the various table areas of ROM 443 store each of the effective lines L1-L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined in the above process is stored as address information in a final stop line address storage area provided in RAM 444. At this time, a process is also executed to store information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area. Note that in the following explanation, address information of the stop result determined in the various stop result determination processes is also stored in the stop result address storage area of RAM 444.

In addition, in the performance setting process for the big win, the variable display mode of the symbols for the big win is determined (variable display mode determination process (performance pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, in the case of a big win result, the result is notified via a reach display, etc. In the variable display mode determination process for the reach display, the variable display pattern table for the reach display stored in various table areas of the ROM 443 is obtained, and the performance pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the variable display time of the currently received variable start command and the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444. In the variable display mode determination process shown below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is obtained from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 443 to determine the performance pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the performance pattern determined in the performance pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444.

In the case of a game result that is not a jackpot result but a reach occurs, a performance setting process for reach occurrence corresponding to a miss result (miss reach) is executed. In this performance setting process, the outline of the performance and the final stop pattern combination are determined. The former is similar to the process for a jackpot result, so the explanation is used. Since this process corresponds to a miss reach, the final stop pattern is determined so that the pattern combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not obtained. In other words, the final stop result in which a miss reach pattern combination is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the type of miss reach pattern combination and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In addition, when determining this, the stop result on the effective line is determined so that the same pattern combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the pattern in the middle pattern row Z2 that is the same as the pattern that forms the reach line is finally stopped at a stop position shifted forward or backward from the reach line. After that, a process is executed to store the information of the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area.

If the result is neither a jackpot nor a miss corresponding to a reach display, i.e., a complete miss, the outline of the complete miss presentation and the final symbol combination to be stopped are determined. Since this process corresponds to a complete miss, the stopping symbols are determined in such a way that a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

After executing the determination process of step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1108, where commands including information on the stop result and presentation pattern are output to the display control device 410 as stop result commands and pattern commands, respectively. Based on these various commands, the MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 253 to execute the presentation for the current game round.

After executing the process of step S1108, in the following step S1109, a process for starting the presentation for the game round is executed, and then this process for starting the fluctuation is terminated. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the presentation pattern determined in the above step S1105, and the presentation for the game round is started.

Here, based on FIG. 29, we will provide additional explanation on the variable display mode of the patterns displayed on the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) in the normal performance mode. FIG. 30(a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of variable display mode, and FIG. 30(b) is a schematic diagram showing an overview of each variable display mode. Note that in FIG. 30(b), for ease of explanation, the background image and pending information displayed on the display screen 253a have been omitted.

(Variable display mode in normal performance mode)
30(a), the variable display modes of the symbols executed on the display screen 253a are roughly divided into five types: complete miss, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. For each of these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and it is possible to grasp the outline of the variable display mode for each game based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162.

Specifically, the display time for a complete miss is "1 sec to 17 sec" (the difference is set depending on the number of reserved balls), the display time for a normal reach A is "18 sec", the display time for a normal reach B is "20 sec or 22 sec" which is longer than the display time for a normal reach A, the display time for a super reach A is "22 sec or 24 sec" which is the same as or longer than the display time for a normal reach B, the display time for a super reach B is "24 sec or 26 sec" which is the same as or longer than the display time for a super reach A, and the display time for a super reach C is "26 sec or 28 sec" which is longer than the display time for other super reaches B. For example, if the information regarding the variable display time given in the command from the main control device 162 is "22 sec," the notification/performance control device 140 will understand that a normal reach B or a super reach A should be executed, and will select which reach display to use.

In addition, in a play round that corresponds to a jackpot result, the order of likely selections is Super Reach C > Super Reach B > Super Reach A > Normal Reach B > Normal Reach A, and in a play round that corresponds to a miss result, the order of likely selections is Complete Miss > Normal Reach A > Normal Reach B > Super Reach A > Super Reach B > Super Reach C. In other words, the longer the variable display time, the higher the chance of winning a jackpot.

Here, the variable display mode of normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (b1). When normal reach A and B are selected, first the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is started, then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is ended (stopped and displayed), and the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is ended (stopped and displayed). In this way, when the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same number are stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 13 (a)), forming a reach line. Then, when the reach line is formed, the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 is performed, resulting in a reach display (reach variable display). After the reach display is reached, the variable display is ended by stopping and displaying the middle symbol row Z2. When the same symbols as those constituting the reach display stop on the reach line, it is announced that a jackpot has been won, and when other symbols stop on the same reach line, it is announced that a jackpot has not been won. In this way, the symbol combination that was finally stopped and displayed is maintained as it is for a predetermined fixed display time (final stop time). In other words, the current game round continues until the fixed display time has elapsed, and when the fixed display time has elapsed, it is permitted to move on to the next game round.

In this embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between normal reach A and normal reach B is ensured by setting a difference in the variable display time of the middle pattern row Z2 after the reach line is formed, but the method for setting the difference between the two is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to ensure the difference in the variable display time by setting a difference in the time from when the variable display begins to when the reach line is formed.

Next, the variable display mode of the super reach A, B, C will be described based on the variable display mode of the normal reach A, B described above. As shown in FIG. 30 (b2) to (b4), for the super reach A, B, C, the above-mentioned reach line is formed through the same process as for the normal reach A, B. Then, after the reach line is formed, a predetermined character is displayed as a video in conjunction with the variable display of the middle pattern column Z2, thereby performing the reach performance. Specifically, in the super reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), in the super reach B, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in the super reach C, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle pattern column Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

(Pseudo continuous fluctuation display)
In the normal presentation mode in this embodiment, a suggestive presentation may be executed to suggest to the player that there is a possibility of transitioning to a reach display, both in a game round corresponding to the reach display and in a game round not corresponding to the reach display. The flow of the suggestive presentation will be described below with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31(a) illustrates the flow of the game when the suggestive presentation is not executed, and FIG. 31(b) illustrates the flow of the game when the suggestive presentation is executed. Note that, in FIGS. 31(a) and (b), illustrations of background images, pending information, and the like displayed on the display screen 253a are omitted, as in FIG. 30(b).

As shown in FIG. 31(a), at the start of a game round, the display of each symbol row that had been statically displayed on the display screen 253a up until that point begins. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display of the symbols, the speed at which the symbols are displayed statically slows down, and each symbol row is statically displayed in the order of upper symbol row → lower symbol row → middle symbol row. If the current game round does not correspond to the above-mentioned suggestive performance, the symbol combination corresponding to the current game result is displayed as a final static combination on the winning line, and the game result is clearly indicated to the player. In the example shown in FIG. 31(a), since the game result is a complete miss, the symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss is displayed as a final static combination on the winning line.

Figure 31 (b) shows an example of a game round corresponding to the suggestion effect and the reach display. At the start of a game round, the display of the varying patterns of each pattern row that was stopped and displayed on the display screen 253a up until that point starts. After that, the speed of the varying pattern display slows down, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed in the order of upper pattern row → lower pattern row → middle pattern row. When the lower pattern row stops, it does not form a reach line with the patterns of the upper pattern row, that is, the patterns in the lower pattern row that can form a reach line with the stopped upper pattern stop at a position shifted from the upper pattern. After that, when the middle pattern row stops and all pattern rows are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display, pause display), a pattern combination (re-changing pattern combination or temporary stop pattern combination) corresponding to the above suggestion is formed at the effective position of the display screen 253a.

After that, all the symbol rows that were temporarily stopped will resume changing accompanied by specific sound effects and effects such as flashes. In other words, it will look as if one round of play has ended, but in reality, the provisional stop → re-change will be performed under a situation where the play is continuing. In other words, before the final stop display, the symbol combination that corresponds to the re-change is displayed as a provisional stop display → re-change, which is the suggestive effect in this embodiment, and in the following explanation, this display will also be referred to as a "pseudo continuous change display".

The pseudo continuous variation display may be executed multiple times in succession (repeatedly) during one game round. Note that during the pseudo continuous variation display, even if all the pattern rows are stopped, the display of the varying patterns continues for the operation port display sections UD and LD of the main display unit 87 that correspond to the current game round.

After the variable display resumes, the timing for the final stop display (confirmed display) arrives, and the symbol combination corresponding to the current game result is displayed as a stopped symbol (final stop display) on the winning line, and the game result is clearly shown to the player. In the example shown in FIG. 31(b), since the game result is a jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as a stopped symbol (final stop display) on the winning line.

As described above, the pseudo continuous variation display in this embodiment occurs not only in game times corresponding to a reach display, but also in game times corresponding to a complete miss result. By leaving room for a jackpot even if the reach display does not shift or a pattern combination corresponding to a jackpot result does not stop, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as a sudden drop in attention to the stopped pattern combination when the lower pattern row or middle pattern row stops.

The table that determines whether or not the pseudo continuous variation display is to be displayed is configured so that the pseudo continuous variation display is more likely to occur in a game that corresponds to a jackpot result than in a game that corresponds to a miss result and a complete miss result, and is also configured so that the pseudo continuous variation display is more likely to occur in a game that corresponds to a miss result than in a game that corresponds to a complete miss result.

Here, referring to FIG. 32, we will provide additional explanation on the flow when the pseudo continuous variation display is repeated during one game round. FIG. 32(a) is a timing chart showing the game flow, and FIG. 32(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between effects and the likelihood of a big win. Note that in FIG. 32(a), to facilitate comparison, ta1 to ta2 are examples of game rounds that do not support the pseudo continuous variation display, and ta3 to ta9 are examples of game rounds that support the pseudo continuous variation display.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), at the timing ta1 when a game round not compatible with pseudo continuous change display starts, the display of changing patterns begins on the operation port display section of the main display unit 87, and accordingly, the display of changing patterns begins on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. At the timing ta2 when a predetermined change display time has elapsed since the start of the change display of the patterns and patterns, the patterns displayed on the operation port display section are displayed as stopped patterns corresponding to the current game result, and the patterns displayed on the display screen 253a are displayed as stopped patterns corresponding to the current game result. In other words, the start/end timing of the changes are synchronized (matched) between the operation port display section and the display screen 253a.

At the time ta3 when a game round compatible with the pseudo continuous change display starts, the display of changing patterns starts on the operating port display section of the main display unit 87, and accordingly, the display of changing patterns starts on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. At the time ta4 when a predetermined period has elapsed since the display of changes started at the time ta3, the re-changing pattern combination is provisionally stopped and displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a.

At time ta5, which is the temporary stop time after time ta4, the display of the temporarily stopped symbol rows resumes. At this time, a white effect is added along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a, suggesting the possibility of transitioning to a reach display. During this time, the display of the symbols continues to change on the operation port display section of the main display unit 87, and the display of the symbols on the display screen 253a and the display of the symbols on the operation port display section become asynchronous.

At the timing ta6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the resumption of the variable display, the re-variable symbol combination is again temporarily stopped and displayed on the active line of the display screen 253a. At the timing ta7, when the temporary stop time has elapsed since the timing ta6, the variable display of each temporarily stopped symbol row is resumed. At this time, the color of the white effect being displayed on the display screen 253a is changed from white to blue. Details will be described later, but the repeated pseudo continuous variable display (the effect color changes (steps up)) suggests that the possibility of transitioning to a reach display has increased. Note that during this time, the variable display of the symbols continues on the operation port display section, and the variable display of the symbols on the display screen 253a and the variable display of the symbols on the operation port display section are asynchronous.

At ta8 after ta7 when the variable display of the patterns is resumed, i.e., at the transition to the reach display, the upper and lower pattern rows are displayed as still symbols, and only the middle pattern row continues to display as still symbols. In the example shown in FIG. 32(a), the current game result corresponds to a miss result. Therefore, after the transition to the reach display, more specifically at ta9 when the variable display time has elapsed from ta3, a pattern corresponding to the miss result is displayed as still symbols in the operation port display section, and the pattern combination corresponding to the miss result is finally displayed as still symbols on the display screen 253a. After that, at ta10 when the final display time has elapsed, the game moves to the next game round.

In the above example, the pseudo continuous variation display is repeated twice during one game, but the number of times the pseudo continuous variation display is repeated during one game is set to a certain range (1 to 6 times in this embodiment). The table that determines the number of pseudo continuous variation displays is configured so that the number of pseudo continuous variation displays set is likely to be greater in a game corresponding to a jackpot result than in a game corresponding to a miss result and a complete miss result, and the number of pseudo continuous variation displays set is likely to be greater in a game corresponding to a miss result than in a game corresponding to a complete miss result. The more pseudo continuous variation displays are displayed, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so it is assumed that players who expect a jackpot will expect many pseudo continuous variation displays to continue. Note that in this embodiment, the variation display executed after the first temporary stop is counted as the first one, and the number of consecutive pseudo continuous variation displays is shown.

In this embodiment, the color of the effect on the display screen 253a changes each time the pseudo continuous variation display continues, indicating the likelihood of transitioning to a reach display. Even if the player misses part of the pseudo continuous display, it is possible to confirm the likelihood of transitioning to a reach display from the color of the effect.

As shown in Figure 32(b), the effects displayed during the pseudo continuous display change in the following order as the number of consecutive pseudo continuous variation displays increases: White → Blue → Yellow → Green → Red → Rainbow. The expectation of a transition to a reach display, in other words the expectation of a jackpot result, increases in the order of White < Blue < Yellow < Green < Red < Rainbow. Of these colors, green through rainbow (four to six consecutive pseudo continuous variation displays) guarantees a transition to a super reach, and rainbow (six consecutive pseudo continuous variation displays) guarantees a jackpot.

In this configuration, it is assumed that the player expects the pseudo-continuous display to occur during a game round, and that if a pseudo-continuous change display occurs, it will continue. By diversifying the presentation of parts other than the reach display during a game round executed in the normal presentation mode, it is possible to increase the attention paid to the game.

Returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process in FIG. 28, if a negative judgment is made in step S1102 of the fluctuation start process, i.e., if the game is in a normal game state compatible with the high frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, a presentation decision process for the high frequency support mode is executed. After the presentation decision process is executed in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108, where a stop result command and a pattern command are set based on the decision content, and after the game number presentation start process is executed in step S1109, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

In the effect determination process of step S1107, if the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result (i.e., a special jackpot result or a normal jackpot result), a jackpot effect setting process is executed. In the jackpot effect setting process, the final stop result of the jackpot pattern is determined (final stop result determination process is performed). In the final stop result determination process, if the result is a special jackpot result, the stop result in which the same combination of specific patterns (main patterns with odd numbers) or the same combination of non-specific patterns (main patterns with even numbers) are finally stopped and displayed on the active line is determined as the stop result for this game round. Also, if the result is a normal jackpot result, the stop result in which the same combination of non-specific patterns (main patterns with even numbers) are finally stopped and displayed on the active line is determined as the stop result for this game round.

In addition, the big win presentation setting process determines the variable display mode of the big win pattern (variable display mode determination process (presentation pattern determination process)). As already explained, when a big win occurs, the result is notified via a reach display or the like. In the reach display variable display mode determination process, a variable display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is obtained, and a reach display presentation pattern corresponding to the variable display time of the currently received variation start command and the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of RAM 444.

If the game result corresponds to a miss reach, a presentation setting process for the occurrence of a reach corresponding to the miss result is executed. In this presentation setting process, the outline of the presentation and the final symbol combination to be stopped are determined. The former is similar to the process for a jackpot result, so the explanation is used here. Since this process corresponds to a miss reach, the stop symbols are determined so that the symbol combination does not correspond to a jackpot result. In other words, the stop result for this time is determined to be the stop result in which a combination of miss reach symbols is formed on the effective line. In addition, when making this determination, the stop result on the effective line is determined so that the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, which are the same as the symbols forming the reach line, are finally stopped at a stop position shifted forward or backward from the reach line. After that, a process is executed to store the information of the determined stop result in the stop result address memory area.

If the result is neither a jackpot nor a miss corresponding to a reach display, i.e., a complete miss, the outline of the complete miss presentation and the final symbol combination to be stopped are determined. Since this process corresponds to a complete miss, the stopping symbols are determined in such a way that a symbol combination corresponding to a jackpot result is not formed.

As already explained, during high-frequency support mode, most of the game balls launched to the right route are guided to the lower operating port 83b by the electric device 91. In addition, in high-frequency support mode, the variable display time in a game corresponding to a complete miss result is shorter than in low-frequency support mode (see Figures 24 (b) and (c)). In this way, the speed at which the game progresses is changed, enhancing the sharpness of the game.

During the normal presentation mode described above, almost the entire display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 is set as the variable pattern display area ME. In contrast, during the presentation mode (time-saving presentation mode) corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 33(a), the patterns are displayed in a reduced size in the upper right area (reduced display area SE) of the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, and the variable/stopped pattern display is performed in the upper right area. A girl character CP1 is displayed in the area (the central part of the display screen 253a) that is left vacant by the reduced size of the patterns, and this character CP1 performs a predetermined action (movement) according to the progress of the game. In this way, by significantly changing the display mode from the low-frequency support mode, the normal presentation mode during the low-frequency support mode and the time-saving presentation mode during the high-frequency support mode are differentiated.

Next, the flow of the presentation in the high frequency support mode will be explained with reference to Fig. 33(b) and Fig. 34. Fig. 33(b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game, and Fig. 34 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the display presentation. Note that Fig. 33(b) illustrates an example in which a game round corresponding to a losing result starts at each of the timings tb1, tb3, tb5, and tb7.

In the example shown in FIG. 33(b), at timing tb1 during the high frequency support mode, the display of the changing patterns displayed stationary in the reduced display area SE of the pattern display device 253 (display screen 253a) begins. The girl character CP1 displayed in the lower right portion (initial position) of the display screen 253a begins to move across the display screen 253a from right to left in time with the start of the changing pattern display (see FIG. 34(a1)). In this embodiment, the girl character CP1 is configured to transition to a reach display after catching the fairy character CP2, but during the changing pattern display an image of the girl character CP1 moving around in search of the fairy character CP2 is displayed.

At time tb2, the symbol combination corresponding to the losing result is displayed as a final stop (confirmed display) in the reduced display area SE. Between time tb2 and time tb3, when the confirmed display time has elapsed, character CP1 returns to its initial position (the lower right part of the display screen 253a).

A series of actions of character CP1 displayed between tb1 and tb2 are stored as performance data in character ROM 476 of display control device 410. Timings tb3 and tb4 and tb5 and tb6 are also play times corresponding to complete misses, and the same performance (search performance) as between tb1 and tb2 is repeated using the performance data.

At tb7, which follows tb6, a game corresponding to a missed reach is started. On the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253, the display of the varying symbols in the reduced display area SE and the animated display of the characters in the varying display area ME are started at tb6. At tb8, a predetermined time has passed since tb7 (for example, the same time as the varying display time shown at tb1 to tb2), and a branching effect (capture effect) indicating the possibility of transitioning to a reach display is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(b), a fairy character CP2 is displayed on the display screen, and in the branching effect, a chase between the girl character CP1 and the fairy character CP2 is displayed on the display screen 253a. Whether or not the girl character CP1 is able to catch the fairy character CP2 after the chase indicates whether or not the game will move to a reach display. In a game round that supports the reach display, a branching effect is displayed in which the girl character CP1 catches the fairy character CP2 (success display), and in a game round that does not support the reach display, a branching effect is displayed in which the girl character CP1 lets the fairy character CP2 escape (failure display).

In the example shown in FIG. 33(b), at timing tb9, a success display appears and transitions to a reach display. At timing tb9, a stage is displayed in the center of the display screen 253a, and a scoreboard is displayed above the stage. Then, a girl character CP1, who had been waiting (stopped) in the corner of the display screen 253a until then, moves toward the stage, and after reaching the stage, a singing performance is executed in which she sings a song (see, for example, FIG. 34(b)).

When the singing performance ends, the numbers that were being displayed on the scoreboard are frozen, and the result of this game round is announced based on the frozen numbers (scores). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(b), if the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result, "100 points" is displayed on the scoreboard, the display of the middle symbol row stops, and the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot is displayed as the final frozen combination. On the other hand, if the current game round corresponds to a miss result, "0 points" is displayed on the scoreboard, and the middle symbol row that had been displaying a constant fluctuation stops, and the symbol combination corresponding to the miss result is displayed as the final frozen combination. In this way, the timing at which the symbols are frozen after the reach performance is synchronized with the timing at which the display of the symbols on the operation port display section of the main display unit 87 ends.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, the variable display time may be set to 5 seconds in some game turns corresponding to a complete miss (see FIG. 24). The sum of this variable display time and the fixed display time (1 second) matches the execution time (6 seconds) of the branching effect in the game turn corresponding to the reach display. In the game turn corresponding to a complete miss, after the failure display is executed in the branching effect, the game turn ends without transitioning to the reach display.

As already explained, the high-frequency support mode can be broadly divided into those that are entered after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the result of a special jackpot, and those that are entered after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the result of a normal jackpot. The latter will transition to the low-frequency support mode when the number of plays in the high-frequency support mode reaches a preset termination reference number. The time-saving presentation mode described above will also end with the transition to the low-frequency support mode. At the time of this transition, a presentation corresponding to the end of the time-saving presentation mode (end suggestion presentation) is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34(a2), in a game round related to the end of the time-saving presentation mode, the display screen 253a goes dark during the variable display and fixed display. Then, when the fixed display ends, the darkening is lifted and the reduced display of the symbols is lifted, switching to the display corresponding to the normal presentation mode. The end indication presentation can also occur in a game round other than the game round related to the end of the time-saving presentation mode. In this case, although the display screen 253a goes dark during the variable display and fixed display, the time-saving presentation mode display will continue after the darkening is lifted with the end of the fixed display (see FIG. 34(a2)→(a1)).

During the time-saving presentation mode, a presentation (preview presentation) suggesting the contents of the reserved information stored in reserved ball storage area 432 of RAM 404 is configured to be executed with a predetermined probability before the start of the game round related to that reserved information. By executing a presentation corresponding to reserved information that has not yet become the subject of a lottery at a timing before the game round related to that reserved information becomes the subject of a lottery, the player is not only able to check the lottery result of the reserved information corresponding to the current game round, but also to check or predict the result when the reserved information that will later become the subject of a lottery becomes the subject of a lottery, depending on the content of the presentation, which diversifies the game. This can increase the attention to the game.

To enable such advance notice effects, the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 is configured to determine in advance whether or not the result corresponds to a jackpot result before the game round related to the stored reserved information is started. Below, with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 35 and 36, we will provide additional explanations on the various processes for advance notice effects executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, specifically the confirmation process for reserved notices and the reserved command setting process executed as part of the information acquisition process (see Figure 19).

(Confirmation process for pending notice)
As shown in Fig. 35, in the confirmation process for the reserved ball notice, in step S1301, the activation reserved ball memory number N and the common reserved ball number CRN stored in the reserved ball number memory area of the reserved ball storage area 432 are read, and the information on the reserved ball number is stored in the register of the MPU 402. After that, in steps S1302 to S1306, it is confirmed whether the reserved ball information acquired by the current winning includes information on a big win. Specifically, first, in step S1302, the information for determining a big win among the reserved ball information acquired in the above step S304 based on the current winning of the activation openings 83a and 83b is grasped, that is, the value of the already acquired winning random number counter C1.

In the next step S1303, it is determined whether or not the mode is low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current win/lose lottery mode is low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage area 435 of the RAM 404. If it is low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1304, where the win/lose table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15(a)) and the information for determining the jackpot grasped in step S1302 (the value of the win random number counter C1) are referenced to determine whether the information is included in the information group corresponding to the jackpot win. If it is high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1305, where the win/lose table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15(b)) and the information for determining the jackpot grasped in step S1302 (the value of the win random number counter C1) are referenced to determine whether the information is included in the information set as the jackpot win.

After executing the processes of step S1304 or step S1305, the process proceeds to step S1306. If the information for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won (the value of the winning random number counter C1) obtained in step S1302 corresponds to a jackpot win, a positive determination is made in step S1306, and the process proceeds to step S1307. After the jackpot information is stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S1307, the confirmation process for this pending notice is terminated.

In the process of step S1307, the information for determining the type of jackpot among the reserved information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning is obtained, i.e., the value of the already acquired win type counter C2, and the type of jackpot is determined by referring to the allocation table. The information stored in the register of MPU 402 in step S1407 includes information related to the type of jackpot.

If the information for determining whether or not a jackpot has been reached in step S1302 (the value of the hit random number counter C1) does not correspond to a jackpot win, a negative judgment is made in step S1306, and the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, the information for determining whether or not a jackpot has been reached is obtained from the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the actuator ports 83a and 83b, that is, the value of the already acquired reach random number counter C3.

In the next step S1309, the reach judgment table (reach judgment information group) stored in the reach judgment table storage area (reach judgment information group storage means) of ROM 403 is referenced to determine whether the reach judgment information grasped in step S1308 (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as a reach win.

After executing the process of step S1309, the process proceeds to step S1310, where it is determined whether the information for reach determination grasped in step S1308 (the value of the reach random number counter C3) corresponds to the occurrence of a reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, then in step S1311, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, and then this confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

(Setting pending commands)
Next, the setting process of the reserved command will be described with reference to FIG. 36. In the setting process of the reserved command, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 402, and it is determined whether or not the information for jackpot determination is specified as corresponding to the jackpot win in the immediately preceding confirmation process for reserved notice (FIG. 35). If the jackpot information is stored, the process proceeds to step S1402, and a reserved command corresponding to the jackpot is set. The setting of the above command and the setting of various commands described later are performed by storing the command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 404. The reserved command corresponding to the jackpot includes information regarding the type of the jackpot.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1401, that is, if it is judged that no jackpot information is stored in the register of MPU 402, the process proceeds to step S1403, where it is judged whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 402, thereby judging whether or not the information for reach judgment was identified as corresponding to the reach occurrence in the immediately preceding hold notice confirmation process (FIG. 35). If reach occurrence information is stored, a miss reach corresponding hold command is set in step S1404, and if reach occurrence information is not stored, a complete miss corresponding hold command is set in step S1405.

When setting a hold command in steps S1402, S1404, and S1405, the variable display time is determined by referring to the value of the variable type counter CS, and information related to the variable display time is stored in the hold command. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referenced, as in the variable display time setting process shown in step S708 above. The hold command set in this way is sent to the notification/performance control device 140, and the notification/performance control device 140 can grasp the variable display mode of the pattern, etc. based on the hold command. As already explained, in the case of a complete miss, the variable display time may change depending on the number of hold information stored when starting a game round related to the hold information. Therefore, when setting a hold command for a complete miss, a provisional setting of the variable display time is performed.

The notification/performance control device 140 determines whether or not to perform a preview performance based on the reserved command received from the main control device 162 and the lottery table for the preview performance. The lottery table for the preview performance is set in the order of reserved commands corresponding to a complete miss result < reserved commands corresponding to a reach miss result < reserved commands corresponding to a jackpot result. As with the pseudo continuous variation display described above, six patterns of effects are provided for the preview performance: white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, and the expected probability of a jackpot result is set in the order of white < blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow. Note that, among the effect colors in the preview performance, green to rainbow correspond to the reach display, and rainbow corresponds to a jackpot, as with the pseudo continuous variation display. If it is not confirmed that a reach display will occur, the effect will not be green or above, and if it is not confirmed that a jackpot will occur, the effect will not be rainbow.

If a hold command is received when no effect is occurring, a decision is made as to whether or not to generate an effect in a game play prior to the game play related to the hold command. If a hold command is received when an effect is occurring, a decision is made as to whether or not to rank up the color of the effect in a game play prior to the game play related to the hold command. Once an effect has occurred, it is erased when either the mode transition effect or the reach effect described above occurs.

Note that, while in the pseudo-continuous change display, the effect display is completed within one play round, in the preview performance, the effect display continues across multiple play rounds, which is a difference. Also, in the pseudo-continuous change display, the number of pseudo-continuous changes matches the color of the effect, but in the preview performance, the number of play rounds consumed during the preview performance does not necessarily match the color of the effect. In other words, in the preview performance, the color of the effect may not change (step up) even if the play rounds progress.

Here, an overview of the preview performance will be explained with reference to the schematic diagram in Figure 37(a). Figure 37(a) shows an example in which there are two pieces of reserved information waiting to be played after the current game round, and the preview performance is triggered by the second of these pieces of reserved information (the reserved information corresponding to the jackpot result).

When the symbol combination corresponding to a losing result is finally displayed (confirmed display), the next pending information (winning result) triggers a preview performance. In this preview performance, a white effect is added to the display screen 253a along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a. This effect will be carried over to the next round of play.

When the game moves to the next round and the symbol combination that corresponds to the losing result is finally displayed (confirmed display), the color of the effect changes from white to blue. This indicates that the possibility of a reach display (jackpot) occurring has increased. This effect will be carried over to the next round (i.e. the relevant round that triggered the hold notice). For that round, it corresponds to a reach display, and the effect that is currently displayed will be erased when the current round (reach display) ends.

In this embodiment, the variable display time corresponding to the reach display in the high-frequency support mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time corresponding to the reach display in the low-frequency support mode, thereby speeding up the progress of the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(b), the variable display time corresponding to the reach display in the low-frequency support mode is set to 18 sec to 28 sec, whereas in the high-frequency support mode, the variable display time corresponding to the reach display is standardized to 17 sec. Furthermore, all reach displays executed in the high-frequency support mode are configured to be the super reach D described above.

Here, in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the presentation mode becomes the special presentation mode, and the main presentation, including the reach display, becomes the same as in the time-saving presentation mode. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the time-saving presentation mode is occurring during the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, and prevents the game from becoming monotonous in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

However, since the special presentation mode is a presentation mode executed during the low-frequency support mode, even if the same presentation as the special presentation mode (Super Reach D) is executed, the variable display time is not shortened accordingly. In other words, even if the variable display time corresponding to any of Normal Reach A, Normal Reach B, Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach C is set in the main control device 162, the notification/presentation control device 140 is configured to execute Super Reach D instead of those various reaches based on the fact that the presentation mode is the special presentation mode. In this case, there will be a difference in the variable display time between the Super Reach D executed in the high-frequency support mode and the Super Reach D executed in the special presentation mode, but one of the features of this embodiment is that it is devised to make the flow of presentation in the special presentation mode closer to the flow of presentation in the time-saving presentation mode by making good use of the parts where such differences occur. The configuration related to the special presentation mode will be explained below.

First, returning to the explanation of the fluctuation start process in FIG. 28, if a positive judgment is made in step S1104 of the fluctuation start process, i.e., if the special presentation mode flag is stored in the various flags storage area 466 of RAM 444, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, a presentation decision process for the special presentation mode is executed. After the presentation decision process is executed in step S1106, a stop result command and a pattern command are set based on the decision content in step S1108, and after the game number presentation start process is executed in step S1109, this fluctuation start process is terminated. Here, the presentation decision process for the special presentation mode will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39.

(Special effect mode effect determination process)
As shown in FIG. 38(a), in the effect determination process for the special effect mode, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a jackpot result (i.e., a guaranteed jackpot result or a normal jackpot result). If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to a miss reach. If a positive determination is made in either step S1501 or step S1502, a special effect setting process for a reach is executed in step S1503. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in both step S1501 and step S1502, i.e., if the current game round corresponds to a complete miss, a special effect setting process for a complete miss is executed in step S1504.

(Special effect setting process for reach)
As shown in FIG. 38(b), in the special effect setting process for reach, first, in step S1511, the time from the start of the fluctuation to the transition to the reach display is specified. As already explained, in the special effect mode, the reach display is unified to the Super Reach D. In other words, even if the main control device 162 specifies any of 18 sec to 28 sec as the fluctuation display time, the Super Reach D will be executed (see FIG. 37(b)). In this embodiment, the execution time of the reach display in the Super Reach D is specified to be 10 sec, and the time required to transition to the reach display is specified by subtracting the execution time of the Super Reach D from the fluctuation display time in this game round.

In the next step S1512, the time required to transition to the reach display is divided by the reference time, that is, the number of divisions (each divided section is also called a "part" in the following explanation) of the section before the reach display in the game round is divided by the reference time is calculated. Here, a supplementary explanation of the reference time is given with reference to FIG. 24(c). As described above, in the high frequency support mode, most of the game balls launched to the right route are supported by the electric role 91 and enter the lower operating port 83b. Therefore, in a situation where game balls are continuously launched to the right route during the high frequency support mode, the number of reserved balls related to the lower operating port 83b fluctuates between "2" and "4", and the variable display time is 1 sec and the fixed display time is 1 sec for most game rounds. In other words, the time required for one game round is often 2 sec.

The character ROM 476 of the notification/effect control device 140 stores an effect (a video of the girl character CP1 moving back and forth on the display screen 253a) with a playback time of 2 sec, and in the time-saving effect mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, this effect is repeatedly played. This time is the reference time. In the following explanation, the above-mentioned video and the pattern change display to stop display (including both temporary stop display and confirmed display) performed in parallel with this video are referred to as the "first special effect". Note that, during the temporary stop display in the special effect mode, a pattern combination corresponding to a complete miss is displayed to resemble the time-saving effect mode. Incidentally, in the special effect mode, a configuration is realized in which the first special effect and the like are used to make it appear as if the game rounds are progressing one after another in a pseudo manner, and these individual changes are also called "pseudo changes" or "unit displays".

For example, if the fluctuating display time is 18 seconds, the time required until the reach display is 8 seconds, and if this is divided by the reference time (2 seconds), the division number is "4". If the fluctuating display time is 20 seconds, the time required until the reach display is 10 seconds, and if this is divided by the reference time (2 seconds), the division number is "5". If the fluctuating display time is 22 seconds, the time required until the reach display is 12 seconds, and if this is divided by the reference time (2 seconds), the division number is "6". If the fluctuating display time is 24 seconds, the time required until the reach display is 14 seconds, and if this is divided by the reference time (2 seconds), the division number is "7". If the fluctuating display time is 26 seconds, the time required until the reach display is 16 seconds, and if this is divided by the reference time (2 seconds), the division number is "8". If the variable display time is 28 seconds, the time required until the reach display is 18 seconds, and when this is divided by the reference time (2 seconds), the division number becomes "9".

In the next step S1513, the upper limit (number of consecutive times) that the first special effect can be executed consecutively in the section before the transition to the reach display is set by referring to the consecutive number setting table and the random number for the lottery stored in ROM 443. Specifically, the first and second consecutive numbers that allow the first special effect to be executed consecutively are set.

In this embodiment, the first and second consecutive numbers indicate the number of times the first special effect is executed in succession without the second special effect or the third special effect described later. For example, if the first special effect is executed once, the first consecutive number is "1", and if the first special effect is executed twice in a row, the second consecutive number is "2". In contrast, the number of consecutive changes in the display until the second or third special effect ends, with the first special effect being "0", is called the "consecutive change number" and is distinguished from the consecutive number. For example, if the first special effect is executed once, the continuous change number is "0", if the first special effect is executed twice in a row, the continuous change number is "1", and if the first special effect is executed twice in a row and then the second special effect is executed, the continuous change number is "2". Incidentally, in each of the figures such as Figures 40 and 41 referred to in the following explanation, the continuous change number in each part is expressed by a number.

If this game round corresponds to a miss reach, the consecutive number setting table for miss reaches stored in ROM 443 is referenced. The consecutive number setting table for miss reaches has "1" to "5" set as the first consecutive number, and one of these five options is set as the first consecutive number for this game round.

If the game round corresponds to a winning reach, the consecutive number setting table for winning reach stored in ROM 443 is referenced. The consecutive number setting table for winning reach has "1" to "6" set as the first consecutive number, and one of these six candidates is set as the first consecutive number for the game round.

In the consecutive number setting table for miss reaches, the selection probability increases in the order of "5" < "4" < "3", "2", "1", and in the consecutive number setting table for hit reaches, the selection probability increases in the order of "1" < "2" < "3" < "6" < "5" < "4". Therefore, the higher the consecutive number, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Note that a consecutive number of "6" corresponds to a jackpot, and when the consecutive number becomes "6", that is, when the number of consecutive changes including the second special effect becomes "6", it is clearly indicated that a jackpot has been confirmed at that point. Incidentally, in this embodiment, when the number of consecutive changes becomes "6", the effect described below becomes rainbow colored.

Details will be given later, but in this embodiment, the first special effects may be divided into two parts by inserting a second special effect in the section before the reach display. The second number of consecutive occurrences specifies, for example, the upper limit of the number of consecutive occurrences of the first special effects in the first half of such a divided section. The second number of consecutive occurrences is set to "3", with the following exceptions.

The second consecutive number of times can be set to anything other than "3" if it corresponds to a jackpot and the first consecutive number of times is "5" or more. In such a case, the second consecutive number of times may be increased to the same number as the first consecutive number of times. If the second consecutive number of times is increased from "3" to "4" to "6", an event may occur in which the consecutive number of times does not develop into a super reach even though it has reached, for example, "4", but this functions as a confirmation that a jackpot will occur immediately afterwards.

The RAM 444 of the notification/effect control device 140 is provided with a continuity counter that stores the number of times (continuous result) the first special effect was executed before the start of the game round (for example, in the immediately preceding game round), more specifically, the number of times (continuous result) the first special effect was repeated without any other effects in between. The continuity counter is configured to be incremented by "1" each time the first special effect is executed, and to be cleared to "0" when an effect other than the first special effect (for example, the second special effect or the third special effect described below) is executed. For example, even if the first special effect was consecutive over multiple game rounds executed before the game round, that is, the first special effect was repeated without any other special effects in between, the continuity result counter is incremented each time the first special effect is executed. In the following step S1514, the continuity counter is referenced to identify the continuity result.

Then, in step S1515, the pattern setting process for reach effects (pattern setting process for reach effects) is executed, and then the setting process for special effects is terminated. Here, the pattern setting process for reach effects will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 39.

(Reach performance pattern setting process)
In the reach effect pattern setting process, first, in step S1601, the section (divided part) before the reach effect in the game is divided into two sections. Specifically, when the super reach D is executed in the special effect mode, the branch effect (hereinafter also referred to as the second special effect) is passed through as in the time-saving effect mode. The execution time of the second special effect (6 sec in this embodiment) is an integer multiple of the above part (reference time). Therefore, the multiple parts before the super reach D are used for the second special effect, and the section before the reach effect is divided into the first half section (first section) for the first special effect and the second half section (second section) for the branch effect. Incidentally, the remaining time obtained by subtracting the execution time of the second special effect from the section before the reach effect is the time during which the first special effect can be executed in the first half section.

After dividing into the first half section and the second half section in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether the number of parts constituting the first half section is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of consecutive times (first consecutive times) set in step S1513. Details will be described later, but if the first special effect is applied to all parts constituting the first half section and the number of consecutive times exceeds the first consecutive times, it is easy for the flow of the performance to feel unnatural. Therefore, if there is at least a possibility that the number of consecutive times will exceed the first consecutive times, the performance pattern is determined by arranging the second special effect in one of the above parts to avoid the first special effect being consecutive so that it exceeds the first consecutive times. For example, the first special effect group is divided into front and back by interposing the second special effect between multiple consecutive first special effects.

If a positive determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, the value of the consecutive counter is referenced to determine whether the consecutive result from the previous game round is "0", i.e., whether the previous game round ended with something other than the first special effect.

If the value of the continuity counter is "0", in step S1604, the presentation pattern for this game round (the allocation pattern for the first special presentation and the second special presentation) is determined without considering the flow from the previous game round. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification/presentation control device 140 stores first special pattern tables according to various conditions such as the result of the winning lottery, the upper limit number, and the number of parts in the first half section, and in the processing of step S1604, one of these first special pattern tables that corresponds to the current conditions is selected, and the presentation pattern is determined by referring to the selected first special pattern table. The first special pattern tables are broadly divided into a table group corresponding to a jackpot result and a table group corresponding to a loss result.

In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, the selection rate is set to be different so that a pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before the transition to reach display is more likely to be selected than a pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects. When the second special effect is inserted to limit the number of consecutive times according to the upper limit, the number of consecutive first special effects after the second special effect tends to be large among the first special effect group (part) divided before and after by the second special effect.

For example, if the number of plays corresponding to the jackpot result is "6" for the first consecutive number of plays, "2" for the second consecutive number of plays, and "6" for the number of parts in the first half section, then a table that corresponds to these conditions is selected from the first special pattern table group. The first special pattern table that corresponds to these various conditions has presentation patterns A1, B1, C1, and D1 (see FIG. 40(a)).

The performance pattern A1 is configured to apply the first special effect to all parts from the first part to the sixth part, and the intervention of the second special effect between the successive first special effects is avoided. When a game is played with this performance pattern A1, the first special effect is repeated six times before moving to the second section, as shown in Example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 41. Specifically, the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a, and the entire pattern row changes in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)), and the pattern combination corresponding to the miss is temporarily displayed after a predetermined change display time (1 sec). This flow is executed six times, and the number of continuous changes including the second special effect executed in the second section is six. Then, after the second special effect, the Super Reach D is executed.

In the performance pattern B1, the first special performance is applied to the first part, the second special performance is applied to the second to fourth parts, and the first special performance is applied to the fifth to sixth parts, and the first special performance group is divided into front and back by the second special performance. In this performance pattern B1, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 41, the first special performance is executed at the beginning of the game round, and then the second special performance is executed, and the first special performance is repeated twice before moving to the second section. Specifically, the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a from side to side, and the entire pattern row changes in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)), and the pattern combination corresponding to the miss result is temporarily stopped and displayed after a predetermined change display time (1 sec). This flow is executed twice just before the second section, and the number of continuous changes when the second special performance executed in the second section is included thereafter is two. Then, after the second special performance, the super reach D is executed.

Effect pattern C1 is configured to apply the first special effect to parts 1 and 2, the second special effect to parts 3 and 5, and the first special effect to part 6, with the first special effect group being divided into front and back by the second special effect. Effect pattern D1 is configured to apply the second special effect to parts 1 and 3, and the first special effect to parts 4 and 6, with the second special effect being executed at the beginning followed by the first special effect.

In the first special pattern table corresponding to the winning result described above, the number of times the first special effect appears in succession before the reach display increases in the order of effect pattern C1 < effect pattern B1 < effect pattern D1 < effect pattern A1, and the selection rate of each effect pattern also increases in the order of effect pattern C1 < effect pattern B1 < effect pattern D1 < effect pattern A1.

In the table group corresponding to a miss result, a difference is set in the selection rate so that a pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before the transition to reach display is more likely to be selected than a pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects, and when the second special effect is inserted to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the number of consecutive first special effects after the second special effect tends to be smaller in the first special effect group (part) divided into front and back by the second special effect.

In this way, one play session is divided into multiple play sessions, giving the appearance that the play sessions are progressing at a short pace, giving the player the impression that they are in a time-saving mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S1603 in FIG. 39, if a negative judgment is made in step S1603, and the previous game round ended with the first special effect (if the value of the consecutive counter is not 0), the effect pattern (allocation pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) for this game round is determined in step S1605, taking into account the flow from the previous game round. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification/effect control device 140 stores second special pattern tables according to various conditions such as the result of the winning lottery, the upper limit number, the number of parts in the first half section, and the consecutive results from the previous game round, and in the process of step S1604, one of these second special pattern tables that corresponds to the current condition is selected, and the effect pattern is determined by referring to the selected second special pattern table.

The second special effect pattern table, like the first special effect pattern table, is broadly divided into a table group corresponding to a jackpot result and a table group corresponding to a miss result. For either table group, the intervention point of the second special effect is specified so that the consecutive number of times does not exceed the above-mentioned upper limit (first consecutive number of times) when the previous play count is taken into account.

In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, the selection rate is set to be different so that a pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before the transition to reach display is more likely to be selected than a pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects. When the second special effect is inserted to limit the number of consecutive times according to the upper limit, the number of consecutive first special effects after the second special effect tends to be large among the first special effect group (part) divided before and after by the second special effect.

For example, if the play count corresponding to the jackpot result is that the first consecutive play count is "6", the second consecutive play count is "6", the number of parts in the first half section is "6", and the consecutive play count from the previous play count is "1", the second special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions is referenced (see FIG. 40(b)). The second special pattern table corresponding to these various conditions has presentation patterns A2, B2, and C2.

The performance pattern A2 is configured to apply the second special performance to the first to third parts and the first special performance to the fourth to sixth parts, respectively, and the first special performance continues after the second special performance is executed at the beginning. When a game round is executed with this performance pattern A2, as shown in Example 1 of the schematic diagram of FIG. 42, the second special performance is executed at the beginning of the first section, so that the continuity from the previous game round is interrupted before reaching the upper limit. In the first section, the first special performance is repeated three times while the second special performance ends and the second section is started. Specifically, the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a and the entire pattern row changes in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)), and the pattern combination corresponding to the miss result is temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined change display time (1 sec). This flow is executed three times, and the number of consecutive times including the second special performance executed in the second section is three. Then, after the second special performance, the super reach D is executed.

Presentation pattern B2 is configured to apply the first special effect to the first part, the second special effect to the second to fourth parts, and the first special effect to the fifth to sixth parts, with the first special effect dividing the group of effects into front and back by the second special effect. When presentation pattern B2 is executed as the presentation pattern, as shown in example 2 of the schematic diagram in FIG. 42, the first special effect is executed once at the beginning of the first section, and then the second special effect is executed. This second special effect causes the continuity from the previous play round to be interrupted before the upper limit is reached. In the first section, the first special effect is repeated twice between the end of the second special effect and the transition to the second section. Specifically, the girl character CP1 moves back and forth across the display screen 253a, and the entire symbol row changes in the reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)) described above, and the symbol combination that corresponds to the miss is temporarily displayed after a predetermined change display time (1 sec). This sequence is executed twice, and the number of consecutive times including the second special performance executed in the second section is two. Then, after the second special performance, Super Reach D is executed.

In presentation pattern C2, the first special effect is applied to parts 1 and 2, the second special effect to parts 3 and 5, and the first special effect to part 6, with the first special effect being divided into front and back by the second special effect. The first special effect is executed twice at the beginning of the first section, and then the second special effect is executed. As a result, the number of consecutive times from the previous play round becomes four with the second special effect. Normally, four consecutive times corresponds to the development of Super Reach D, but in presentation pattern C2, the first special effect is executed again after the second special effect, and it does not develop into Super Reach D. This presentation pattern C2 is one of the contradictory effects mentioned above.

In the second special pattern table corresponding to the winning result described above, the number of times the first special effect appears in succession before the reach display increases in the order of effect pattern B1 < effect pattern A1, and the selection rate of each effect pattern also increases in the order of effect pattern B1 < effect pattern A1. In contrast, in the second special pattern table corresponding to the losing result, the number of times the first special effect appears in succession before the reach display is configured to be less than the second special pattern table corresponding to the winning result. The selection rate for effect pattern C2 is configured to be lower than the selection rates for effect pattern A2 and effect pattern B2.

In the table group corresponding to a miss result, a difference is set in the selection rate so that a pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before the transition to reach display is more likely to be selected than a pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects, and when the second special effect is inserted to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the number of consecutive first special effects after the second special effect tends to be smaller in the first special effect group (part) divided into front and back by the second special effect.

In this way, one play session is divided into multiple play sessions, giving the appearance that the play sessions are progressing at a short pace, giving the player the impression that they are in a time-saving mode.

Returning to the explanation of step S1602 in FIG. 39, if a negative determination is made in step S1602, i.e., if the number of parts in the first half section is below the upper limit of the number of consecutive plays, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, the value of the consecutive counter is referenced to determine whether the consecutive result from the previous play round is 0, i.e., whether the previous play round ended with something other than the first special effect.

If the value of the continuity counter is 0, in step S1607, the presentation pattern for this game round (the allocation pattern for the first special presentation and the second special presentation) is determined without considering the flow from the previous game round. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification/presentation control device 140 stores third special pattern tables according to various conditions such as the result of the winning lottery, the upper limit number, and the number of parts in the first half section, and in the processing of step S1607, one of these third special pattern tables that corresponds to the current conditions is selected, and the presentation pattern is determined by referring to the selected third special pattern table. The third special pattern tables are broadly divided into a table group corresponding to a jackpot result and a table group corresponding to a loss result.

In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, the selection rate is set to be different so that a pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before the transition to reach display is more likely to be selected than a pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects. When the second special effect is inserted to limit the number of consecutive times according to the upper limit, the number of consecutive first special effects after the second special effect tends to be large among the first special effect group (part) divided before and after by the second special effect.

In the table group corresponding to a miss result, the selection rate is set to be different so that a pattern with fewer consecutive first special effects before the transition to reach display is more likely to be selected than a pattern with a larger number of consecutive first special effects. When the second special effect is inserted to limit the number of consecutive times according to the upper limit, the number of consecutive first special effects after the second special effect tends to be smaller among the first special effect group (part) divided before and after by the second special effect.

The third special pattern table has the same basic structure as the first special pattern table, but there is a large bias in the selection rate of effect patterns with a large number of consecutive first special effects executed before the reach display transition compared to effect patterns with a small number. Compared to gameplay times where the first special pattern table is referenced, there is a tendency for the number of parts in the first half section to be smaller in gameplay times where the third special pattern table is referenced. By increasing the bias in selection rate as described above, it is possible to earn a large number of consecutive times and continuous fluctuations before the reach display even if the number of parts in the first half section is small.

Returning to the explanation of step S1606, if a negative judgment is made in step S1606, that is, if the previous game round ended with something other than the first special effect (if the above-mentioned continuous counter is not 0), the effect pattern (allocation pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) for this game round is determined in step S1608, taking into account the flow from the previous game round. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification/effect control device 140 stores fourth special pattern tables according to various conditions such as the result of the winning lottery, the upper limit number, and the number of parts in the first half section, and in the process of step S1607, one that corresponds to the current condition is selected from those fourth special pattern tables, and the effect pattern is determined by referring to the selected fourth special pattern table. The fourth special pattern tables are broadly divided into a table group corresponding to a jackpot result and a table group corresponding to a loss result.

In the table group corresponding to the jackpot result, the selection rate is set to be different so that a pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before the transition to reach display is more likely to be selected than a pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects. When the second special effect is inserted to limit the number of consecutive times according to the upper limit, the number of consecutive first special effects after the second special effect tends to be large among the first special effect group (part) divided before and after by the second special effect.

In the table group corresponding to a miss result, a difference is set in the selection rate so that a pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects before the transition to reach display is more likely to be selected than a pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects, and when the second special effect is inserted to limit the number of consecutive times according to the above upper limit, the number of consecutive first special effects after the second special effect tends to be smaller in the first special effect group (part) divided into front and back by the second special effect.

The fourth special pattern table has the same basic structure as the second special pattern table, but has a large bias in the selection rate of effect patterns with a large number of consecutive first special effects executed before the reach display transition compared to effect patterns with a small number. Compared to gameplay times where the second special pattern table is referenced, there is a tendency for the number of parts in the first half section to be smaller in gameplay times where the fourth special pattern table is referenced. By making the bias in the selection rate larger as described above, it is possible to earn a large number of consecutive times before the reach display even if the number of parts in the first half section is small.

As detailed above, by dividing one play session into multiple play sessions and making it appear as if the play session is progressing at a short pace, the player can be given the impression that they are in a time-saving mode.

After executing the processes of steps S1604 to S1608, the process proceeds to step S1609, where an effect setting process is executed. In the special effect mode of this embodiment, when the first special effect is being repeated, an effect may be displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 along the outer periphery of the display screen 253a. As with the effects displayed during the pseudo continuous variation display in the normal effect mode, six colors are provided for this effect: white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, and the order of expectation of a jackpot increases in the following order: white < blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow.

In the effect setting process of step S1609, the color of the final effect and its step-up pattern are determined based on the current game result and the presentation pattern determined in steps S1604 to S1608. In the case of a jackpot result, the final effect is most likely to be selected in the following order: white < blue < yellow < rainbow < green < red. The effect set in step S1609 is released when the reach display for this game round ends.

Incidentally, the effects displayed during the special effect mode may also be displayed in a game round that corresponds to a complete miss result. The effects that begin to be displayed in a game round that corresponds to a complete miss result are basically deactivated when the second special effect, the third special effect, or the end of the reach display is reached, and are not deactivated when the first special effect is being repeated. For this reason, the effect display may continue across game rounds. Taking such circumstances into consideration, in the special effect mode, the number of consecutive occurrences of the first special effect and the number of step-ups of the effect do not necessarily match, and the number of step-ups may be less if the color of the effect remains the same.

In the case of a missed reach, the order of most likely to be selected is red < green < yellow < blue < white, with rainbow not being a possible choice. Also, as will be explained in more detail later, in the case of a complete miss, the order of most likely to be selected for the final effect is yellow < blue < white, with green, red and rainbow not being a possible choice. In the normal presentation mode, rainbow corresponds to a jackpot, and green, red and rainbow correspond to a super reach. By removing some colors from the possible choices depending on the game result, a correlation is created between the display of effects in the normal presentation mode and the display of effects in the special presentation mode.

Returning to the explanation of the effect determination process for the special effect mode shown in FIG. 38(a), if a negative judgment is made in both step S1501 and step S1502, i.e., if the game round corresponds to a complete miss result, the process proceeds to step S1504. After the complete miss special effect setting process is executed in step S1504, the effect determination process for this special effect mode is terminated. Here, the complete miss special effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 43.

(Special effect setting process for complete miss)
In the complete miss special effect setting process, first, in step S1701, the number of divisions (number of parts) is calculated by dividing the variable display time of the game by the above-mentioned reference time (2 sec), which is the execution time of the first special effect. If a remainder occurs due to the division, this is rounded up to the next division number. This is a device to use a part of the fixed display time (2 sec) after the variable display time as the execution time of the first special effect, etc. In consideration of this situation, it can be said that the calculation in step S1701 divides the entire section, which is the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time (2 sec), by the reference time. In this case, the remainder is rounded down.

For example, if the variable display time is 17 sec, the division number when it is divided by the reference time is 8 remainder 1, and is rounded up to "9". In other words, if the variable display time is 17 sec, the number of parts is "9". If the variable display time is 15 sec, the division number when it is divided by the reference time is 7 remainder 1, and is rounded up to "8". In other words, if the variable display time is 15 sec, the number of parts is "8". If the variable display time is 3 sec, the division number when it is divided by the reference time is 1 remainder 1, and is rounded up to "2". In other words, if the variable display time is 3 sec, the number of parts is "2". If the variable display time is 1 sec, the division number when it is divided by the reference time is 0 remainder 1, and is rounded up to "1". In other words, if the variable display time is 1 sec, the number of parts is "1".

In the next step S1702, the number of times (upper limit) that the first special effect can be executed consecutively in this game round is set by referring to a consecutive number setting table for complete misses stored in ROM 443 and a random number for the lottery.

The consecutive number setting table for complete misses has consecutive numbers of "1" to "3", and one of these three options is set as the upper limit for this game round. The consecutive number setting table for complete misses is configured so that the selection probability increases in the order of "1" < "2" < "3". Even if the upper limit is set high due to factors such as the balance with the variable display time and the influence of consecutive results in the previous game round, the actual consecutive number will be less than that. Therefore, in the game round corresponding to a complete miss, the selection probability is deliberately specified so that the upper limit is likely to be high, thereby suppressing the frequent intervention of the second special effect and the like.

In the next step S1703, the continuous counter provided in the RAM 444 of the notification/effect control device 140 is referenced to determine the number of times (continuous result) the first special effect was executed before the start of this game round (for example, in the immediately preceding game round), more specifically, the number of times (continuous result) the first special effect was repeated without any other effects in between.

After executing the process of step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704, where it is determined whether or not this game round is the final game round in the special presentation mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special presentation mode end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 466 of the RAM 444. The special presentation mode end flag is a flag stored in step S1209 of the special presentation mode process (see FIG. 29).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, it is judged whether or not subsequent reserved information is stored. If a negative judgment is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, it is judged whether or not the above-mentioned effect is displayed on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253. If a negative judgment is made in step S1704 or if a positive judgment is made in step S1705, the process proceeds to step S1707, and after executing the first setting process in step S1707, the complete miss performance pattern setting process is terminated. In other words, if it is not the final game round of the continuous performance mode and there is subsequent reserved information, or if there is no subsequent reserved information but no effect has occurred, the first setting process is executed. Here, the first setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 44.

(First setting process)
In the first setting process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether the total number of parts is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the consecutive number of times. If the determination in step S1801 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, it is determined whether the value of the consecutive counter is 0, that is, whether consideration is given to the flow of the previous game round.

If it is determined in step S1802 that the value of the consecutive counter is "0", i.e., if the previous game round ended with something other than the first special effect, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1803, the fifth special pattern table stored in ROM 443 is referenced to determine the effect pattern (the allocation pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect). The fifth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the consecutive number of times, the total number of parts, etc. In the process of step S1803, the fifth special pattern table that corresponds to the current condition is selected from the fifth special pattern tables, and the effect pattern is determined by reference to the selected fifth special pattern table.

For example, if the upper limit of consecutive plays is "3" and the total number of parts is "9", a fifth special pattern table that corresponds to these conditions is selected. The fifth special pattern tables that correspond to these various conditions include performance patterns A5, B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, and G5 (see FIG. 45(a)).

The performance pattern A5 is configured to apply the first special performance to the first to third parts, the second special performance to the fourth to sixth parts, and the first special performance to the seventh to ninth parts, respectively, and the first special performance group is divided into front and back by the second special performance. In this performance pattern A5, as shown in Example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 46, the first special performance is executed three times at the beginning of a game round, and then the second special performance is executed, and the first special performance is repeated three times again between the second special performance and the end of the game round. Specifically, the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a and the entire pattern row changes in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)), and a pattern combination corresponding to a miss result is temporarily stopped and displayed after a predetermined change display time (1 sec) has elapsed. This flow is executed three times each with the second special performance in between. In other words, the second special effect causes the number of consecutive changes in the first half to be "3", including the second special effect, and the number of consecutive changes in the second half to be "2". The game will end with the number of consecutive changes at "2".

Effect pattern B5 is configured to apply the first special effect to parts 1 and 2, the second special effect to parts 3 and 5, the first special effect to part 6, and the second special effect to parts 7 and 9. In effect pattern B5, the first special effect is executed twice at the beginning of a game round, and then the second special effect is executed, and the second special effect is executed again after one first special effect.

Effect pattern C5 is configured to apply the first special effect to the first part, the second special effect to the second to fourth parts, the first special effect to the fifth to sixth parts, and the second special effect to the seventh to ninth parts. In effect pattern C5, the first special effect is executed once at the beginning of a game round, and then the second special effect is executed again after two first special effects.

In effect pattern D5, the first special effect is applied to the first part, the second special effect to the second to fourth parts, the first special effect to the fifth part, the second special effect to the sixth to eighth parts, and the first special effect to the ninth part. In effect pattern D5, the first special effect and the second special effect are executed alternately.

Effect pattern E5 is configured to apply the second special effect to parts 1 to 3, the first special effect to parts 4 to 6, and the second special effect to parts 7 to 9. In effect pattern E5, the second special effect is executed at the beginning of a game round, then the first special effect is executed three times, and then the second special effect is executed again.

Effect pattern F5 is configured to apply the second special effect to parts 1 to 3, the first special effect to parts 4 to 5, the second special effect to parts 6 to 8, and the first special effect to part 9. In effect pattern F5, the second special effect is executed at the beginning of a game round, and then the first special effect is executed twice, and then the second special effect is executed, and then the first special effect is executed once again.

Effect pattern G5 is configured to apply the second special effect to parts 1 to 3, the first special effect to part 4, the second special effect to parts 5 to 7, and the first special effect to parts 8 to 9. In effect pattern G5, the second special effect is executed at the beginning of a game round, followed by the first special effect once, and then the second special effect is executed, followed by the first special effect twice again.

In this way, by using the first and second special effects together to make one play session appear as if it were divided into multiple play sessions, the player can be given the impression that they are in a time-saving mode.

In the fifth special pattern table detailed above, the number of times the second special effect is executed in effect pattern A5 (part occupancy rate) is less than effect patterns B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, and G5, and the selection rate of each effect pattern is set so that effect patterns B5, C5, D5, E5, F5, and G5 are less than effect pattern A5. This prevents the frequency of occurrence of the second special effect from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in the fifth special pattern table, the game round ends with either the first special effect or the second special effect, but the number of continuous changes when the game round ends with the second special effect is at most "3", and the number of continuous changes when the game round ends with the first special effect is at most "2". The reason why the effect pattern in which the game round ends with the first special effect is provided is to ensure an opportunity to carry over the number of continuous changes to the next game round, assuming that the next game round is coming up. However, in such a configuration, it may be necessary to secure time to end the continuous change in the next game round. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, in addition to the second special effect, a third special effect that requires a shorter time than the second special effect is provided as a special effect that triggers the end of the continuous change. The required time for this third special effect is set so that the third special effect can be executed even if the change display time of the next game round is the shortest (for example, 1 sec). This ensures that even if the continuous fluctuation is carried over to the next game round, there will be an opportunity to end the continuous fluctuation in the next game round.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 39, if a negative judgment is made in step S1802, that is, if the previous game round ended with the first special effect (if the consecutive result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, the sixth special pattern table stored in ROM 443 is referenced to determine the effect pattern (the allocation pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect). The sixth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the consecutive number of times, the total number of parts, and the consecutive result from the previous game round. In the process of step S1804, one of the sixth special pattern tables that corresponds to the current condition is selected, and the effect pattern is determined by reference to the selected sixth special pattern table.

For example, if the upper limit is "3", the total number of parts is "9", and the consecutive result from the previous play is "1", a sixth special pattern table that corresponds to these conditions is selected. The sixth special pattern tables that correspond to these various conditions include performance patterns A6, B6, C6, D6, and E6 (see FIG. 45(b)).

The presentation pattern A6 is configured to apply the first special presentation to the first part, the second special presentation to the second to fourth parts, the first special presentation to the fifth to sixth parts, and the second special presentation to the seventh to ninth parts. In this presentation pattern A6, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 46, the first special presentation is performed once at the beginning of a game round, and then the second special presentation is performed again after two first special presentations. Specifically, the girl character CP1 moves back and forth on the display screen 253a and in the above-mentioned reduced display area SE (see FIG. 33(a)), the entire pattern row changes, and a predetermined change display time (1 sec) passes, causing the pattern combination corresponding to the miss result to be temporarily stopped and displayed. This flow is performed a total of three times from the previous game round, and is performed twice again with the second special presentation in between. In the first half of this game round, the number of continuous changes inherited from the previous game round is suppressed to "3". Then, in the second half of this game round, the game round ends with the second special performance, and the number of consecutive changes is limited to "2."

In effect pattern B6, the first special effect is applied to the first part, the second special effect to the second to fourth parts, the first special effect to the fifth part, the second special effect to the sixth to eighth parts, and the first special effect to the ninth part, and the first special effect group is divided into front and back by the second special effect. In this effect pattern B6, the first special effect and the second special effect are executed alternately.

Effect pattern C6 is configured to apply the second special effect to parts 1 to 3, the first special effect to parts 4 to 6, and the second special effect to parts 7 to 9.

Effect pattern D6 is configured to apply the second special effect to parts 1 to 3, the first special effect to parts 4 to 5, the second special effect to parts 6 to 8, and the first special effect to part 9.

Effect pattern E6 is configured to apply the second special effect to parts 1 through 3, the first special effect to part 4, the second special effect to parts 5 through 7, and the first special effect to parts 8 through 9.

By using the first and second special effects together in this way to make one play session appear as if it were divided into multiple play sessions, the player can be given the impression that they are in a time-saving mode.

The sixth special pattern table described above is configured such that the selection rate of the presentation pattern differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the sixth special pattern table is broadly divided into a sixth special pattern table X that is referenced when the interval time from the previous game round matches the confirmed display time (2 sec) in the low-frequency support mode, i.e., when the reserved information for the previous game round has already been obtained at the end of the previous game round, and a sixth special pattern table Y that is referenced when the interval time from the previous game round exceeds the confirmed display time (2 sec) in the low-frequency support mode, i.e., when the reserved information for the previous game round has not been obtained at the end of the previous game round.

The sixth special pattern table X is set so that the selection rate of the effect patterns A6 and B6, which start with a first special effect, is higher than the selection rate of the effect patterns C6, D6, and E6, which start with a second special effect. The sixth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the effect patterns A6 and B6 is lower than that of the sixth special pattern table X, eliminating preferential treatment of the effect patterns A6 and B6 over the other effect patterns.

By configuring the game so that the first special effect is likely to occur at the beginning of the later game round when the earlier and later game rounds are played consecutively with a minimum interval between them, the player is prevented from getting the impression that the occurrence of the second special effect indicates the start of a game round, making the break between game rounds less noticeable.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 44, if a negative judgment is made in step S1801, that is, if the total number of parts in the current game round is below the upper limit of the consecutive number of times, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, it is judged whether the value of the consecutive counter is "0". If a positive judgment is made in step S1805, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, the seventh special pattern table stored in ROM 443 is referenced to determine the presentation pattern (the allocation pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect). The seventh special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the consecutive number of times and the total number of parts. In the process of step S1806, one of the seventh special pattern tables that corresponds to the current condition is selected, and the presentation pattern is determined by reference to the selected seventh special pattern table.

The seventh special pattern table has the same basic structure as the fifth special pattern table, with a difference in selection rate so that a pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects is more likely to be selected than a pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects. The bias in selection rate is greater than that of the fifth special pattern table, making it possible to increase the chances of the first special effect being executed even if the total number of parts is below the upper limit.

Returning to the explanation of step S1805, if a negative judgment is made in step S1805, that is, if the previous game round ended with something other than the first special effect (the above-mentioned consecutive counter is not 0), in step S1807, the flow from the previous game round is taken into consideration and the performance pattern for this game round (the allocation pattern for the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification/performance control device 140 stores eighth special pattern tables according to various conditions such as the upper limit of consecutive times, the total number of parts, and the consecutive results from the previous game round, and in the processing of step S1807, one of these eighth special pattern tables that corresponds to the current condition is selected, and the performance pattern is determined by referring to the selected eighth special pattern table.

The eighth special pattern table has the same basic structure as the sixth special pattern table, and the selection rate of the presentation pattern differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the eighth special pattern table is broadly divided into an eighth special pattern table X, which is referenced when the interval time from the previous game round matches the confirmed display time (2 sec) in the low-frequency support mode, i.e., when the reserved information for the previous game round has already been obtained at the end of the previous game round, and an eighth special pattern table Y, which is referenced when the interval time from the previous game round exceeds the confirmed display time (2 sec) in the low-frequency support mode, i.e., when the reserved information for the previous game round has not been obtained at the end of the previous game round.

The eighth special pattern table X is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is higher than the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the second special effect is executed at the beginning. The eighth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the effect patterns A6 and B6 in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is lower than that of the eighth special pattern table X, eliminating preferential treatment over other effect patterns.

By configuring the game so that the first special effect is likely to occur at the beginning of the later game round when the earlier and later game rounds are played consecutively with a minimum interval between them, the player is prevented from getting the impression that the occurrence of the second special effect indicates the start of a game round, making the break between game rounds less noticeable.

In the eighth special pattern table, as with the sixth special pattern, there is a difference in the selection rate so that a pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects is more likely to be selected than a pattern with a small number. However, this bias in selection rate is greater than in the sixth special pattern table, so it is possible to increase the chances of the first special effect being executed even if the total number of parts is below the upper limit.

After the performance pattern is set in steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807, the effect setting process is executed in step S1808, and then this first setting process is terminated.

As already explained, in the special presentation mode of this embodiment, when the first special presentation is being repeated, an effect may be displayed on the display screen 253a of the symbol display device 253 along the outer periphery of said display screen 253a. As with the effects displayed during the pseudo continuous variation display in the normal presentation mode, these effects come in a total of six colors: white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow, and are set in the order of increasing likelihood of a jackpot: white < blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow.

In the effect setting process of step S1808, the effect display, effect color, and step-up pattern are determined based on the current game result and the effect pattern determined in steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807. In the special effect mode, the effect display set in the previous game round may continue into the current game round across game rounds. Therefore, if an effect has been carried over from the previous game round, it is determined whether or not to update the color of the effect to a higher level, and if the color is to be updated, the step-up pattern to that color is determined. The step-up pattern also includes information on which part the effect is to be released at and whether or not the effect is to be carried over to a later game round.

If the effect display has not been carried over from the previous game, or if it has been carried over but the effect is cancelled midway, a decision is made as to whether or not to generate a new effect, and the effect color and step-up pattern are also determined. Incidentally, the effect step-up timing is configured to coincide with the timing at which the temporarily stopped symbols start to change again.

Returning to the explanation of the complete miss special effect setting process in FIG. 43, if it is the final play in the special effect mode, or if an effect is occurring even though there is no pending information waiting, the process proceeds to step S1708, where the second setting process is executed, and then the complete miss special effect setting process is terminated. Here, the second setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 47.

(Second setting process)
In the second setting process, first, in step S1901, the third special effect is set in the final part. The third special effect is an effect corresponding to the end suggestion effect (see FIG. 34(a)) executed in the time-saving effect mode described above. Specifically, in a game round related to the end of the special effect mode, the display screen 253a goes dark during the variable display to fixed display. Then, when the fixed display ends, the darkening is released, and the reduced display of the pattern is released, and the display is switched to the display corresponding to the normal effect mode. The end suggestion effect is configured to occur in a game round other than the game round related to the end of the time-saving effect mode. In this case, although the display screen 253a goes dark during the variable display to fixed display, the display of the time-saving effect mode continues after the darkening is released with the end of the fixed display.

For the third special effect, data for end suggestion effects stored in the display control device 410 whose execution time matches the above-mentioned reference time (data with a duration of 2 seconds) is used. In subsequent processing, the effect pattern for the remaining parts is determined.

After executing the processing of step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, it is determined whether the number of remaining parts excluding the final part is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the consecutive number of times. If a positive determination is made in step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1903, it is determined whether the value of the consecutive counter is "0", that is, whether consideration needs to be given to the flow of the previous game round.

If it is determined in step S1903 that the value of the consecutive counter is "0", i.e., if the previous game round ended with something other than the first special effect, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, the ninth special pattern table stored in ROM 443 is referenced to determine the effect pattern (the allocation pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect). The ninth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the consecutive number of times, the number of remaining parts, etc. In the process of step S1904, one of the ninth special pattern tables that corresponds to the current conditions is selected, and the effect pattern is determined by reference to the selected ninth special pattern table.

For example, if the upper limit of consecutive plays is "3" and the number of remaining parts is "8" (total number of parts is "9"), a pattern that corresponds to these conditions is selected from each of the 9th special pattern tables. The 9th special pattern tables that correspond to these various conditions include performance patterns A9, B9, C9, D9, and E9 (see FIG. 48(a)).

In effect pattern A9, the first special effect is applied to parts 1 to 3, the second special effect to parts 4 to 6, the first special effect to parts 7 to 8, and the third special effect to part 9, with the first special effect group being divided into front and back by the second special effect. The third special effect is executed in the final part of a game round, ending that game round, and the special effect mode also ending accordingly.

In the presentation pattern B9, the first special effect is applied to the first and second parts, the second special effect to the third and fifth parts, the first special effect to the sixth and eighth parts, and the third special effect to the ninth part. In this presentation pattern B9, as shown in Example 1 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49, the first special effect is executed twice at the beginning of a game round, followed by the second special effect, and three first special effects and one third special effect are executed between the second special effect and the end of the game round. The second special effect that intervenes makes the number of continuous changes in the first half "3" including the second special effect, and the number of continuous changes in the second half "3" including the third special effect. The special effect mode ends with the game round.

Effect pattern C9 is configured to apply the first special effect to the first part, the second special effect to the second to fourth parts, the first special effect to the fifth part, the second special effect to the sixth to eighth parts, and the third special effect to the ninth part.

Effect pattern D9 is configured to apply the second special effect to parts 1 to 3, the first special effect to parts 4 to 5, the second special effect to parts 6 to 8, and the third special effect to part 9.

Effect pattern E9 is configured to apply the second special effect to parts 1 to 3, the first special effect to part 4, the second special effect to parts 5 to 7, the first special effect to part 8, and the third special effect to part 9.

In the ninth special pattern table described above, the number of times the second special effect is executed (part occupancy rate) in effect patterns A9 and B9 is less than that of effect patterns C9, D9, and E9, and the selection rate of each effect pattern is set so that effect patterns C9, D9, and E9 are less than effect patterns A9 and B9. This prevents the frequency of occurrence of the second special effect from becoming excessively high.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 47, if a negative judgment is made in step S1903, and the previous game round ended with the first special effect (if the consecutive result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, the effect pattern (allocation pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined by referring to the tenth special pattern table stored in ROM 443. The tenth special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the consecutive number of times, the number of remaining parts, and the consecutive result from the previous game round. In the process of step S1904, the tenth special pattern table that corresponds to the current condition is selected from the tenth special pattern tables, and the effect pattern is determined by referring to the selected tenth special pattern table.

For example, if the upper limit is "3", the number of remaining parts is "8" (total number of parts is "9"), and the consecutive result from the previous play is "1", a pattern that corresponds to those conditions is selected from each of the 10th special pattern tables. The 19th special pattern table that corresponds to these various conditions has performance patterns A10, B10, and C10 (see FIG. 48(b)).

Effect pattern A10 is configured to apply the first special effect to the first part, the second special effect to the second to fourth parts, the first special effect to the fifth part, the second special effect to the sixth to eighth parts, and the third special effect to the ninth part.

Effect pattern B10 is configured to apply the second special effect to parts 1 to 3, the first special effect to parts 4 to 5, the second special effect to parts 6 to 8, and the third special effect to part 9.

The presentation pattern C10 is configured to apply the second special presentation to the first to third parts, the first special presentation to the fourth part, the second special presentation to the fifth to seventh parts, the first special presentation to the eighth part, and the third special presentation to the ninth part. In this presentation pattern C10, as shown in Example 2 in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49, the second special presentation and the first special presentation are alternately performed, and then the third special presentation is performed. Due to each intervening second special presentation, the number of continuous changes in the early stage is "2" including the second special presentation, the number of continuous changes in the middle stage is "1" including the second special presentation, and the number of continuous changes in the final stage is "1" including the third special presentation. Then, the special presentation mode ends with that play round as a trigger.

In the tenth special pattern table described above, the selection rate of the presentation pattern differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round, as in the sixth special pattern table. Specifically, the tenth special pattern table is broadly divided into a tenth special pattern table X, which is referenced when the interval time from the previous game round matches the confirmed display time (2 sec) in the low-frequency support mode, i.e., when the reserved information for the previous game round has already been acquired at the end of the previous game round, and a tenth special pattern table Y, which is referenced when the interval time from the previous game round exceeds the confirmed display time (2 sec) in the low-frequency support mode, i.e., when the reserved information for the previous game round has not been acquired at the end of the previous game round.

The tenth special pattern table X is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern A10, in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning, is higher than the selection rates of the effect patterns B10 and C10, in which the second special effect is executed at the beginning. The tenth special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern A10 is lower than that of the tenth special pattern table X.

By configuring the game so that the first special effect is likely to occur at the beginning of the later game round when the earlier and later game rounds are played consecutively with a minimum interval between them, the player is prevented from getting the impression that the occurrence of the second special effect indicates the start of a game round, making the break between game rounds less noticeable.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 47, if a negative judgment is made in step S1902, that is, if the number of remaining parts in the current game round is below the upper limit of the consecutive number of times, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is judged whether the value of the consecutive counter is "0". If a positive judgment is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, an effect pattern (allocation pattern of the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined by referring to an eleventh special pattern table stored in ROM 443. The eleventh special pattern table is set according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the consecutive number of times and the number of remaining parts. In the process of step S1907, one that corresponds to the current condition is selected from the eleventh special pattern tables, and an effect pattern is determined by referring to the selected eleventh special pattern table.

The 11th special pattern table has the same basic structure as the 9th special pattern table, with a difference in selection rate so that a pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects is more likely to be selected than a pattern with a small number of consecutive first special effects. The bias in selection rate is greater than that of the 5th special pattern table, making it possible to increase the chance of the first special effect being executed even if the number of remaining parts is below the upper limit.

Returning to the explanation of step S1906, if a negative judgment is made in step S1906, that is, if the previous game round ended with something other than the first special effect (the above-mentioned consecutive counter is not 0), in step S1908, the flow from the previous game round is taken into consideration and the performance pattern for this game round (the allocation pattern for the first special effect and the second special effect) is determined. Specifically, the ROM 443 of the notification/performance control device 140 stores 12th special pattern tables according to various conditions such as the upper limit of the consecutive number of times, the number of remaining parts, and the consecutive results from the previous game round, and in the processing of step S1908, one of these 12th special pattern tables that corresponds to the current condition is selected, and the performance pattern is determined by referring to the selected 12th special pattern table.

The 12th special pattern table has the same basic structure as the 10th special pattern table, and the selection rate of the presentation pattern differs depending on the interval time from the previous game round. Specifically, the 12th special pattern table is broadly divided into a 12th special pattern table X that is referenced when the interval time from the previous game round matches the confirmed display time (2 sec) in the low-frequency support mode, that is, when the reserved information for the previous game round has already been obtained at the end of the previous game round, and a 12th special pattern table Y that is referenced when the interval time from the previous game round exceeds the confirmed display time (2 sec) in the low-frequency support mode, that is, when the reserved information for the previous game round has not been obtained at the end of the previous game round.

The 12th special pattern table X is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is higher than the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the second special effect is executed at the beginning. The 12th special pattern table Y is set so that the selection rate of the effect pattern in which the first special effect is executed at the beginning is lower than that of the 12th special pattern table X.

By configuring the first special effect to occur more easily at the beginning of a later play round when the earlier and later play rounds are played consecutively with a minimum interval between them, it is possible to prevent the player from getting the impression that the occurrence of the second special effect indicates the start of a play round, and it has the same function as the 10th special pattern table in that it makes the break between play rounds less noticeable.

In the 12th special pattern table, like the 10th special pattern, there is a difference in the selection rate so that a pattern with a large number of consecutive first special effects is more likely to be selected than a pattern with a small number. However, this bias in the selection rate is greater than in the 10th special pattern table, so it is possible to increase the chances of the first special effect being executed even if the total number of parts is below the upper limit.

After the performance pattern is set in steps S1904, S1905, S1907, and S1908, the effect setting process is executed in step S1909, and then the second setting process is terminated.

The effect setting process in step S1909 is the same as the effect setting process in step S1809, and determines whether to display an effect, the color of the effect, and its step-up pattern based on the current game result and the presentation pattern determined in steps S1904, S1905, S1907, and S1908. In the special presentation mode, the effect display set in the previous game round may continue into the current game round across game rounds. Therefore, if an effect has been carried over from the previous game round, it is determined whether to update the color of the effect to a higher level, and if the color is to be updated, the step-up pattern to that color is determined. The step-up pattern also includes information about at which part the effect will be released.

If the effect display has not been carried over from the previous game round, or if it has been carried over but the effect is to be cancelled midway through, a decision is made as to whether or not to generate a new effect, and the effect color and step-up pattern are determined. Note that the second setting process determines the presentation pattern for the final game round in the special presentation mode, and all displayed effects will be cancelled by the end of that game round.

According to the special presentation mode described above, by dividing one play into multiple parts, it is possible to generate the same presentation as the presentation mode (time-saving presentation mode) corresponding to the high-frequency support mode during the low-frequency support mode. In the time-saving presentation mode, there are more opportunities for a jackpot to occur during the time-saving presentation mode, for reasons such as the fact that the lottery mode may be a high-probability mode. In other words, it is more likely to attract the player's attention than during the normal presentation mode. Therefore, by making it appear as if a presentation similar to that in the time-saving presentation mode is being performed by the special presentation mode, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotony of the game in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. Considering that the game is often played in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, diversifying the presentation in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode as described above is effective in increasing the interest of the game.

When the special effect mode performs the same effect as in the time-saving effect mode, the perception of the effect may vary greatly depending on the player's skill level and knowledge. For example, in the case of a player who is not familiar with the game, it is assumed that the player will recognize the special effect mode as the same effect mode as the time-saving effect mode by its appearance, and the above effect can be achieved. In the case of a player who is familiar with the game, it is assumed that it is not difficult to identify that the special effect mode and the time-saving effect mode are based on different game states, even if they look similar. In addition, if the stored reserved information includes something corresponding to a jackpot result, the transition condition to the special effect mode may be configured to take into account hit/miss information so that it is easier to transition to the special effect mode compared to when it does not include something corresponding to a jackpot result, and the discrepancy between expectations for the special effect mode and expectations for the time-saving effect mode may be reduced.

On the other hand, a player with a certain level of knowledge may interpret the pseudo continuous variation display that occurs in the normal presentation mode as the same as the continuous variation in the special presentation mode. In the pseudo continuous variation display, the expectation of a big win increases dramatically as the number of consecutive variations increases, so it is assumed that the player will play in the hope that the pseudo continuous variation will continue. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 50, if a game round is divided into multiple parts and the first special presentation is performed in all of those parts, the behavior can be made closer to the time-saving presentation mode, but the number of continuous variations will increase significantly. In the pseudo continuous variation display, when the number of times is four, a super reach or higher is confirmed, and when it is six, a big win is confirmed. On the other hand, if the number of continuous variations in the special presentation mode exceeds these thresholds, it is feared that the fact that a large number of continuous variations does not lead to a big win will increase the player's dissatisfaction and reduce his motivation to play. In other words, if you want to achieve an effect similar to that of the normal game mode compatible with the high-frequency support mode within the constraints of the normal game mode compatible with the low-frequency support mode, you will need to devise ways to prevent players from misunderstanding the situation.

In this regard, in the special effect mode shown in this embodiment, the second special effect is inserted into the first special effect group to indicate the end of the continuous fluctuation (to make it look like the continuous fluctuation has been interrupted), thereby preventing the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

The notification/effect control device 140, which acquires the variable display time information from the main control device 162, divides the variable display time by the reference time. The effect pattern is then determined by allocating the first to third special effects to each divided part. The first special effect is configured to use the same effect data as the effect executed in the time-saving effect mode, thereby reducing the amount of data related to the game effects.

In addition, while the variable display time can be set in various ways, by calculating the number of parts using the above calculation and switching the table to be referenced based on the result, it is preferable in that it can promote data sharing when there are many conditions for determining the performance. For example, even if the variable display time is different, if the various conditions with the number of parts are the same, the same table can be referenced. Therefore, it is more advantageous than providing a table for each variable display time.

The execution time of the second special effect and the third special effect is an integer multiple of the execution time of the first special effect. This prevents time surpluses and deficiencies caused by the allocation of the first special effect through the third special effect. This is a desirable configuration for smoothing the flow of the effects.

The execution time of the third special effect is the same length (same time) as that of the first special effect. Specifically, it is 2 seconds, which is shorter than the sum of the shortest variable display time of 1 second and the fixed display time of 2 seconds during the low-frequency support mode. Therefore, if the variable display time for at least one part can be secured, it is possible to stop the succession of the first special effects, and the third special effect can be used to preferably interrupt the continuous fluctuations and end the special effect mode in any play round during the special effect mode. This third special effect is also useful when linking with previous and subsequent play rounds to improve the freedom of the presentation pattern.

In the time-saving presentation mode, if the game ball continues to be launched toward the right route, each game round will progress in 2 seconds. Therefore, in the first special presentation, the variable display time and the temporary stop display time are both set to 1 second, and the execution time of the first special presentation is set to match one game round in the time-saving presentation mode. In this case, when the first special presentation is repeated, the appearance will be the same as the progress in the special presentation mode, and the mimetic effect can be preferably exerted. However, in a game round in the low-frequency support mode, the fixed display time is 2 seconds, which is longer than the fixed display time (1 second) in a game round in the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, in the special presentation mode, the interval between game rounds may cause an awkwardness in the flow of the presentation. It is expected that such an awkwardness will be noticeable when a game round corresponding to a complete miss is repeated.

In this regard, in this embodiment, in a game round corresponding to a complete miss, part of the special effect set last is configured to overlap with the final display. This makes it possible to make the above interval appear shorter than it actually is. Specifically, the variable display times in a game round corresponding to a complete miss are all odd numbers, and are configured to be indivisible by the reference time, which is an even number. The value obtained by subtracting this remainder from the reference time is shorter than the final display time. This establishes a base for using part of the final display time as time for special effects. In this way, by devising the length of the variable display time, the length of the reference time, and the length of the final display time, it is possible to solve the above problem without making major changes to the existing configuration.

In the special presentation mode, the second special presentation intervenes to prevent the number of consecutive wins from becoming excessive. This presentation also occurs in the time-saving presentation mode. As shown in Figures 24(b) and (c), in a game round that corresponds to a complete miss, a variable display time corresponding to the second special presentation (branch presentation) may be set regardless of the number of pending information stored. This prevents the second special presentation from standing out in the special presentation mode.

In the time-saving presentation mode, the speed at which game rounds are played increases, but there is a possibility that game progress may become monotonous. Therefore, pending information relating to future game rounds is identified in advance, and a preview presentation (effect display) is executed based on the result, thereby preventing the presentation from becoming monotonous. Here, in the special presentation mode, an effect display is executed according to the presentation pattern for that game round. In this way, by executing a display presentation similar to that in the time-saving presentation mode, the discrepancy between the time-saving presentation mode and the special presentation mode is prevented.

In the special effect mode, the number of times the first to third special effects (unit display) have been executed is stored, and the special effect mode is maintained until the number of times the special effects (unit display) have been executed is at least the same as the minimum standard number of times to end the high frequency support mode. This prevents a discrepancy between the special effect mode and the time-saving effect mode.

The various special pattern tables are configured in such a way that the first special effect is likely to be executed many times. Since the occurrence rate of branching effects is low even in the time-saving effect mode, suppressing the occurrence of the second special effect prevents such inconvenience from occurring.

Increasing the freedom to set the first special effect by linking it with previous and subsequent play times is preferable in terms of ensuring as many opportunities as possible to execute the first special effect in a configuration in which an upper limit is set on the number of consecutive times.

Second Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the time required for the reach display when the Super Reach D is executed in the special presentation mode is fixed. In this embodiment, a plurality of time periods (e.g., long/short) are set for the reach display, and one of these time periods is selected each time a game is played in which the Super Reach D is executed. Below, the configuration related to the special presentation mode in this embodiment will be described, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

The ROM 443 of the notification/presentation control device 140 stores a required time selection table for reach display that specifies the required time for reach display in a game round corresponding to Super Reach D. When the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140 receives a variable start command and a type command from the main control device 162, it determines whether the game round to be executed this time corresponds to Super Reach D or not based on the variable display time information and hit/miss information contained in those commands, and if the game round this time corresponds to Super Reach D, it refers to the required time selection table to determine the required time (long/short). The difference between these required times is set to be an integer multiple of the reference time mentioned above.

If the time required for the reach display differs, the length of the remaining time excluding the time required for the reach display will also differ, even if the variable display time is the same. In other words, the calculation result when calculating the number of parts in the special effect setting process for reach (step S1512) shown in Figure 38 (b) depends on the time required for the reach display.

As shown in the schematic diagram of Figure 51, when "Long" is selected as the time required for the reach display (see Example 2), there are five parts before the reach display, whereas when "Short" is selected as the time required for the reach display (see Example 1), there are six parts before the reach display. In other words, "Short", which is likely to be selected when a jackpot result has been achieved, has one more part in which the first special effect can be executed compared to "Long". Therefore, it is easier to secure an opportunity to execute the first special effect when "Short" is selected as the required time than when "Long" is selected.

When the reach display is executed in the normal presentation mode, the time required for the reach display is set to be longer for the variable display mode in which the expectation of a jackpot is set higher. In contrast, the required time selection table for the reach display described above is configured so that the required time for the reach display is more likely to be set for a play round corresponding to a jackpot result than for a play round corresponding to a miss result. In other words, in a play round in which Super Reach D is executed, the number of parts until the transition to the reach display is more likely to be longer for a jackpot result than for a miss result.

In the special effect mode, the degree of freedom in allocating the first and second special effects can be increased by earning a certain number of parts before the transition to the reach display. This makes it easier to earn a certain number of consecutive changes before the transition to the reach display, and the effect of increasing attention to the game through the effects in the special effect mode can be more effectively exerted.

Third Embodiment
In the special effect mode shown in the second embodiment, the time required for the reach display is determined based on the variable display time information and the hit/miss information from the main control device 162. In this embodiment, the configuration related to the determination of the required time is partially different from that in the second embodiment.

Specifically, when determining the time required for the reach display in the special presentation mode of this embodiment, the consecutive results from the previous game round and the above-mentioned upper limit for that game round are referenced in addition to the variable display time information and win/lose information from the main control device 162. In other words, the consecutive results from the previous game round and the set upper limit are taken into consideration when determining the time required for the reach display, that is, after the consecutive results have been specified and the upper limit has been set, the time required for the reach display is determined based on these.

More specifically, the required time selection table for the reach display stored in the ROM 443 of the notification/effect control device 140 is stored in association with the various conditions of the variable display time information, win/lose information, consecutive results from the previous game round, and the above upper limit for that game round. From among these required time selection tables, the one that corresponds to the current conditions is referenced to determine the required time for the reach display from among "short," "medium," and "long." Note that "short" is configured to have one more part in which the first special effect can be executed than "middle," and "middle" is configured to have one more part in which the second special effect can be executed than "long."

For example, if the number of parts is incomplete, it may be difficult to earn the number of consecutive changes following the reach display in the game, even though it is desired to earn the number of consecutive changes in the game. Specifically, if the required time is set to "middle", and the number of parts in the first section excluding the part for the second special effect (second section) before the reach display transition is "7", the number of consecutive changes following the reach display will be "7" by applying the first special effect to all parts of the first section, exceeding the upper limit of the number of consecutive changes of "6". Although such inconvenience can be avoided by setting the second special effect in the first section, the number of consecutive changes following the reach display will be extremely small. In the required time selection table for the reach display in this embodiment, in such a case, "long" is likely to be selected in order to intentionally lengthen the required time for the reach display by one part, that is, to intentionally reduce the number of parts in the first section by one. More specifically, the selection probability is configured to be higher in the order of "middle" < "short" < "long".

The above detailed configuration can prevent the number of continuous fluctuations from becoming extremely small during a game corresponding to a winning Super Reach D, and prevent the number of continuous fluctuations from becoming extremely large during a game corresponding to a losing Super Reach D. This makes it possible to more effectively realize the technical idea shown in the second embodiment above, that the number of continuous fluctuations can be set in a manner appropriate to the situation.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the presentation pattern in the previous game round (more specifically, the above-mentioned consecutive results) is taken into consideration when determining the presentation pattern in the special presentation mode. In this embodiment, the configuration is different from the first embodiment in that the presentation pattern in the game round following the current game round is taken into consideration when determining the presentation pattern. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the determination of the presentation pattern in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 52 and the timing chart of FIG. 53. In this embodiment, the main configuration is common to the first embodiment, so the description of these common configurations will be omitted.

In the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140, a link setting process is executed as part of the effect determination process (more specifically, the first setting process) for the special effect mode. The link setting process is executed when the current game turn is a complete miss game turn and subsequent reserved information has already been stored at the start of the game turn, and is executed before the determination process of the above steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the link setting process, first in step S2001, it is determined whether the next game round corresponds to a reach display. As already explained, the pending command sent from the main control unit 162 to the notification/presentation control unit 140 includes variable display time information, win/lose information, etc., and the notification/presentation control unit 140 determines whether the next game round corresponds to a reach display based on this information. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, i.e., if the next game round corresponds to a complete miss, this link setting process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2001, the details of the presentation pattern for the next game round are confirmed in step S2002. Specifically, the number of parts (the number of parts in the first section) until the next game round transitions to a reach display is calculated. In the following step S2003, it is judged whether the number of parts constituting the first section of the next game round is less than the practical upper limit (i.e., "6" if it corresponds to a jackpot result, and "5" if it corresponds to a miss result). If a negative judgment is made in step S2003, the link setting process is terminated as it is. If a positive judgment is made in step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, whether or not the current game round can be linked to the next game round is determined by lottery. If the link with the next game round is not to be performed, a negative judgment is made in step S2005, and the link setting process is terminated as it is. If the link with the next game round is to be performed, a positive judgment is made in step S2005, and the process proceeds to step S2006.

In step S2006, an upper limit on the number of consecutive plays across multiple play times is set. After that, in step S2007, a special pattern table to be referenced in the current play time and the next play time is selected, and this link setting process is terminated. In the determination process of steps S1803, S1804, S1806, and S1807 described above, if a special pattern table is selected in step S2007, the presentation pattern is determined by referencing that special pattern table, and if no selection is made, the presentation pattern is determined by referencing the special pattern table selected in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

Now, referring to FIG. 53, an example of a presentation pattern when a combination occurs is shown. At timing tc1 during the confirmation display, a ball enters the upper operating port 83a, and the number of stored pending information increases from "1" to "2." When a game round starts at timing tc2, the display of changing patterns begins on the upper operating port display section of the main display unit 87, and the display of changing patterns begins on the pattern display device 253.

The current play corresponds to a complete miss, and the next play corresponds to a jackpot. The variation display time for the next play is 22 seconds, and the number of parts is "3" in the time excluding the reach display and the branching effect immediately before it (first section). Therefore, the number of times the first specific effect can be executed in the first section of the next play is "3", that is, if continuous variations are performed in the next play alone, the maximum number of continuous variations including the reach display (branching effect) will be "3". The next play corresponds to a win result, and the actual upper limit of the number of continuous variations is "6", so there are insufficient parts in the first section to perform this upper limit of continuous variations.

When a game round starts at tc2, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to link with the next game round. The example in FIG. 54 illustrates a case where this lottery is won. In a game round that starts at tc2, the first special effect is executed once at the beginning, and then at tc3, the second special effect is executed. Then, in the second half of the game round, the first special effect is executed twice in a row. The last first special effect is executed, and ends after the final display of the image on the upper operating port display unit and the image on the image display device 253 begins at tc5.

When the next game round starts at tc6 immediately after the first special effect ends, the display of the changing patterns on the operation port display unit and the display of the changing patterns on the pattern display device 253 start again. At the beginning of the next game round, the first special effect is executed three times, and the number of consecutive first special effects becomes five across the previous game round and the next game round. Then, the second special effect starts as a branching effect at tc7, and the number of consecutive changes including the second special effect becomes "5", and the display transitions to a reach display at tc8. The next game round corresponds to the jackpot result, and at tc9, the display of the stopping pattern (confirmation display) corresponding to the jackpot result starts on the operation port display unit, and the display of the stopping pattern combination (confirmation display) corresponding to the jackpot result starts on the pattern display device 253.

In this way, if the outline of the presentation pattern for the next play round is taken into consideration when deciding on the presentation pattern for the previous play round, it is possible to relax the constraints on the number of consecutive changes. If it becomes possible to earn a number of consecutive changes in the next play round (one play round) alone, it is possible to set the number of consecutive changes appropriately depending on the win/loss result, etc.

Fifth embodiment
In the first embodiment, the special effect mode in the low-frequency support mode executes the same effect as the time-saving effect mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, thereby suppressing monotony of the game in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. As already explained, in the high-frequency support mode, the variable display time and the fixed display time are shorter than those in the low-frequency support mode, and the game progress is accelerated. In order to make it look as if the low-frequency support mode suddenly transitions to the time-saving effect mode by using the special effect mode, it is important to make the effect in the special effect mode and the effect in the time-saving effect mode similar to each other. Therefore, as shown in the first embodiment, there is a technical significance in that the difference in appearance between the effects of both effect modes can be reduced by diverting the video or the like used in the special effect mode to the normal effect mode.

However, due to the difference in the underlying game state between the time-saving presentation mode and the special presentation mode, the reuse of presentation may cause a slight difference in appearance. Below, the cause of this difference will be explained in more detail with reference to Figure 54. Figure 54 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. Note that in Figure 54, the time related to the pattern display on the operating port display section of the main display unit is distinguished as Ta, and the time related to the pattern display on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 (more specifically, the variable display area ME and reduced display area SE) is distinguished as Tb.

When the normal presentation mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the stopped display time (determined display time) Ta1 of the pattern on the operation port display section of the main display unit 87 matches the final stopped display time (determined display time) Tb1 of the pattern on the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) of the pattern display device 253, and the start timing of the stopped display of the pattern on the operation port display section matches the start timing of the final stopped display of the pattern on the display screen 253a (variable display area ME). In other words, the stopped display of the pattern and the stopped display of the pattern are synchronized.

When the time-saving presentation mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the picture and pattern variable display time and fixed display time in each play are shortened compared to the low-frequency support mode, but just like in the normal presentation mode, the stopped display time (fixed display time) Ta2 of the pattern on the operation port display section of the main display unit 87 matches the final stopped display time (fixed display time) Tb2 of the pattern on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the pattern display device 253, and the start timing of the stopped display of the pattern on the operation port display section matches the start timing of the final stopped display of the pattern on the pattern display device 253. In other words, the stopped display of the pattern and the stopped display of the pattern are synchronized.

In contrast, when the special effect mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the stopped display time (determined display time) Ta3 of the pattern on the operation port display section of the main display unit 87 matches the final stopped display time (determined display time) Tb3 of the pattern on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the pattern display device 253, and the timing at which the stopped display of the pattern on the operation port display section starts matches the timing at which the final stopped display of the pattern on the pattern display device 253 starts, but the temporary stopped display time Tb4 of the pattern on the pattern display device 253 matches the final display time Ta2, Tb2 of the pattern and the pattern during the time-saving effect mode, and is shorter than the final display time Ta3, Tb3 of the pattern and the pattern in the special effect mode.

For this reason, in the special effect mode, when the first special effect is repeated during the changing display of the image, the display on the pattern display device 253 is the same as that in the time-saving effect mode, and it is difficult to identify the difference between the time-saving effect mode and the special effect mode just by looking at the display content on the pattern display device 253. Here, in the special effect mode, the temporary stop display time Tb4 when a temporary stop display is performed is shorter than the fixed display time Ta3, Tb3, so that the progress is slightly delayed when the fixed display is performed compared to when the temporary stop is performed. In the first embodiment, as a countermeasure against this, the time for displaying the animation using the character CP1 is set to 2 sec, and when the animation display is performed at the end of a game round, it is configured to overlap with the fixed display time, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned discomfort. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is designed to further reduce such a sense of harmony.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the fixed display time of the pattern in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode is set to be the same as the fixed display time of the pattern in the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode (1 sec). In other words, there is no difference in the stopped display time between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. In the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the stopped display of the pattern and the stopped display of the pattern are synchronized as in the first embodiment. In the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the stopped display of the pattern and the stopped display of the pattern are synchronized during the special performance mode, and the stopped display of the pattern and the stopped display of the pattern are partially asynchronous during the normal performance mode. In detail, when a predetermined condition is met during the normal performance mode, the pattern is displayed in a standby state (temporarily stopped) on the effective line of the variable display area ME, and is switched to a fixed display when a predetermined standby time (1 sec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the standby display.

In the MPU 472 of the display control device 410, the standby display control process, which is the process for the standby display, is executed as part of the display control process (periodic process). The configuration related to the standby display will be described below with reference to Figs. 55 to 57. Fig. 55(a) is a flow chart showing the standby display control process executed in the MPU 472 of the display control device 410, Fig. 55(b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the variable display mode and the standby display, Fig. 56 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the standby display, and Fig. 57 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game.

(Standby display control process)
As shown in Fig. 55(a), in the standby control process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the re-variation display is in progress. In this embodiment, in a part of the game times corresponding to the big win result, a display (re-variation display) may be executed in which a part of the picture rows is re-varied from a state in which a pattern combination corresponding to a miss result is standby-displayed, and the pattern combination displayed on the pay line at the time of the final display is switched to a pattern combination corresponding to the big win result. In step S2101, it is determined whether or not this re-variation display is in progress.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102 to judge whether or not the waiting display is in progress. If a negative judgment is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103 to judge whether or not it is time to start the waiting display. In this embodiment, the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 determines whether or not to perform the waiting display, and the information is transmitted to the display control device 410. The MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140 judges whether or not the game round to be started corresponds to the reach display, and sets the waiting display if it corresponds to the reach display. Also, if it corresponds to a complete miss, the MPU 442 judges whether or not to perform the waiting display based on the number of subsequent pending information. Specifically, if the number of subsequent pending information is less than a predetermined number (two in this embodiment), it is judged that the waiting display is to be performed, and if the predetermined number is reached, it is judged that the waiting display is not to be performed. In other words, if the variable display time is significantly shortened by the subsequent pending information reaching the predetermined number, the waiting display is avoided.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2103, the standby display control process is terminated. If a positive judgment is made in step S2103, the standby display start process is executed in step S2104, and then the standby display control process is terminated. In the standby display control process, a pattern combination corresponding to the miss result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the pay line, and the temporarily stopped pattern group is oscillated in the scroll direction on the pay line.

Returning to the explanation of step S2102, if a positive judgment is made in step S2102, i.e., if the waiting display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2105, where it is judged whether the current play round is a play round related to the re-change display. As described above, in this embodiment, the waiting display → re-change display is executed in some of the play rounds corresponding to the jackpot result. If a positive judgment is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2106.

In step S2106, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the re-changing display. In other words, it is determined whether it is the timing immediately before the final display. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, this standby display control process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S2106, the re-changing display start process is executed in step S2106, and then this standby display control process is terminated. In the re-changing display start process, the scrolling display of some of the pattern rows is resumed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2105, or if it is determined that the game round does not correspond to the re-changing display, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is judged whether or not it is the final stop display timing. More specifically, it is judged whether or not it is the timing when the changing display time for the current game round has elapsed (the timing when the changing end command is received). If a negative judgment is made in step S2108, the process ends this standby display control process. If a positive judgment is made in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109, and after executing the final stop display process, the standby display control process ends. In the final stop display process when the re-changing display has not been passed, the pattern combination being displayed on standby (oscillating) is stopped as it is on the active line, and the pattern combination corresponding to the miss result is displayed as the final stop (confirmed display).

Returning to the explanation of step S2101, if a positive judgment is made in step S2101, i.e., if it is judged that the re-changing display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, it is judged whether or not it is the final stop display timing. In more detail, it is judged whether or not it is the timing when the changing display time for the current game round has elapsed (the timing when the changing end command was received). If a negative judgment is made in step S2108, the standby display control process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109, where the final stop display process is executed, and then this standby display control process is terminated. In the final stop display process when a re-changing display has been passed, the scrolled symbols are stopped on the pay line so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as the final stop (confirmed display).

Next, referring to FIG. 56, we will explain the pattern display when a waiting display occurs. FIG. 56(a) illustrates the case where the reach display is used, and FIG. 56(b) illustrates the case where the reach display is not used.

In Figure 56(a), after the reach display, a standby display is executed with a symbol combination that corresponds to a losing result. In the standby display, each symbol that makes up the symbol combination swings left and right on the winning line. If the current game round corresponds to a losing result, the swinging of all symbols is released a predetermined time after the standby display began, and the symbol combination that corresponds to the losing result is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the winning line. This clearly informs the player that a losing result has occurred.

On the other hand, if the current play round corresponds to a jackpot result, the oscillation is released a predetermined time after the standby display begins, and the middle symbol row scrolls so that the symbol combination displayed on the winning line is changed from one that corresponds to a miss result to one that corresponds to a jackpot result. This clearly informs the player that a jackpot result has occurred.

In addition, in a game corresponding to a winning reach display, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result may be displayed as the final stop (confirmed display) without going through the waiting display, but this is more common than the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as the final stop after going through the waiting display → re-changing display.

In Figure 56 (b), a standby display is displayed with a symbol combination that corresponds to a losing result, without going through a reach display. In the standby display, each symbol that makes up the symbol combination swings left and right on the winning line. If the current game round corresponds to a losing result, the swinging of all symbols is released a predetermined time after the standby display began, and the symbol combination that corresponds to the losing result is finally displayed as a stopped combination (confirmed display) on the winning line. This clearly informs the player that a losing result has occurred.

On the other hand, if the current play round corresponds to a jackpot result, the oscillation is released a predetermined time after the standby display begins, and some of the symbol rows (for example, the upper symbol row) are scrolled so that the symbol combination displayed on the winning line is changed from one that corresponds to a miss result to one that corresponds to a jackpot result. This clearly informs the player that a jackpot result has occurred.

Next, the flow of the game in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart in Figure 57. As in Figure 54, Figure 57 distinguishes between the time related to the pattern display on the operating port display section of the main display unit as Ta and the time related to the pattern display on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253 (more specifically, the variable display area ME and reduced display area SE) as Tb.

When the time-saving presentation mode is set in the normal game state compatible with the high-frequency support mode, as shown in the center of Figure 57, the stopped display time (confirmed display time) Ta6 of the pattern on the operation port display section of the main display unit 87 matches the final stopped display time (confirmed display time) Tb6 of the pattern on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the pattern display device 253, and the start timing of the stopped display of the pattern on the operation port display section matches the start timing of the final stopped display of the pattern on the pattern display device 253. In other words, the stopped display of the pattern and the stopped display of the pattern are synchronized.

When the special presentation mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, as shown on the right side of Figure 57, the stopped display time (determined display time) Ta7 of the pattern on the operation port display section of the main display unit 87 matches the final stopped display time (determined display time) Tb7 of the pattern on the display screen 253a (variable display area ME) of the pattern display device 253, and the start timing of the stopped display of the pattern on the operation port display section matches the start timing of the final stopped display of the pattern on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE). In other words, the stopped display of the pattern and the stopped display of the pattern are synchronized.

In contrast, when the normal performance mode is set in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the stop display time (determined display time) Ta5 of the pattern on the operation port display section of the main display unit 87 and the final stop display time (determined display time) Tb5 of the pattern on the display screen 253a (reduced display area SE) of the pattern display device 253 match, and although the timing of the start of the stop display of the pattern on the operation port display section and the timing of the start of the final stop display of the pattern on the pattern display device 253 match, the total stop display time TbX (2 sec) taking into account the standby display time of the pattern on the pattern display device 253 is longer than the determined display time Ta5, Tb5 (1 sec). In other words, on the pattern display device 253, the pattern is in a standby display state prior to the determined display, and the standby display extends the stop display time. By extending the stop display time by the standby display, it is possible to secure a certain degree of length for the stop display time of the pattern. This is a preferable configuration for encouraging the player to understand the game result.

Here, in the special effect mode, the provisional stop display time Tb8 is the same as the final display time Ta7, Tb7. Therefore, even if a game round is composed of multiple parts by the first special effect or the like, it is possible to prevent the boundary between game rounds from becoming more noticeable due to the difference between the provisional stop display time and the final stop display time. In this way, by making good use of the existing configuration, it is possible to prevent the configuration from becoming complicated, while suitably preventing the occurrence of discomfort when an effect similar to that in the time-saving effect mode is executed in a normal game state compatible with the low-frequency support mode. In addition, since it is possible to perform the stopped display of the pattern in a preferred manner according to the game state while eliminating the need to switch the final display time according to the game state, it is also possible to suitably prevent the sharpness of the game progress from decreasing.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-mentioned embodiments, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by a combination of the embodiments, or may be applied in combination with some or all of the following embodiments.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the transition to the special presentation mode is triggered when the number of plays performed in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode reaches a preset number, but the trigger for transition to the special presentation mode may be changed as follows. That is, the transition to the special presentation mode may be configured to occur when a predetermined time condition is met (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, or when a predetermined time has arrived). In addition, the player may be allowed to select a presentation mode, and when a special presentation mode is specified by the selection operation, the transition to the special presentation mode may occur. It is also possible to use these various transition triggers in combination.

(2) A plurality of types of the first special effects shown in each of the above embodiments may be provided. Specifically, as the first special effects, first special effects A and B with different jackpot expectancies may be provided, and when a reach display that results in a jackpot is executed, the first special effect B is likely to be set as the first special effect that is a precursor to the jackpot, and when a reach display that results in a miss is executed or when a reach display is not executed, the first special effect A is likely to be set as the first special effect. For example, it is preferable to differentiate the girl character CP1 displayed in the first special effect by making the color of the girl character CP1's broom white in the first special effect A and making the color of the girl character CP1's broom red in the first special effect B.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the allocation of the first special effect and the second special effect in the subsequent game round is determined taking into account the number of continuous changes across game rounds, but this is not limited to this. If the number of continuous changes is restricted to "0" at the end of a game round and the influence on subsequent game rounds is eliminated, the special pattern table can be simplified. However, if continuous changes are attempted to be completed in each game round under a situation where there is a lot of reserved information stored (a situation where the time-saving function has a large effect), the deviation from the time-saving performance mode in which the game progresses at a good tempo will become large. Therefore, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the above restriction can be applied or not depending on the number of subsequent reserved information. For example, in a configuration in which the variable display time is significantly shortened when the number of reserved information stored is 2 or more, the above restriction can be applied when the number of reserved information stored is less than "2", and the above restriction can be not applied when the number of reserved information stored is "2" or more.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, when a command corresponding to a miss reach is received during the special effect mode, the miss reach display is executed by repeating the first special effect during the time before the reach display transition, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when a command corresponding to a miss reach is received during the special effect mode, it is also possible to configure the notification/effect control device 140 to decide whether or not to display the reach. If a miss reach is not executed, the first special effect can be executed more times by dividing the entire section.

In the above embodiments, a configuration in which the reach display is executed only once during one game round is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration in which the reach display is executed multiple times during one game round is not denied. In such a configuration, it is sufficient to be configured to notify a miss result at least for the reach display executed before the final reach display.

(5) Although the second special effect shown in each of the above embodiments is configured to have a longer execution time than the first special effect, the execution time of the second special effect can be any length. For example, it may be the same length as the execution time of the first special effect, or it may be shorter than the execution time of the first special effect.

In addition, the third special effect shown in each of the above embodiments is configured so that its execution time is the same as that of the first special effect, but the execution time of the third special effect can be set to any length. For example, it may be shorter or longer than the execution time of the first special effect. However, considering that the second special effect and the third special effect function as stoppers that terminate the succession of the first special effects, it is preferable to make the execution times of the second special effect and the third special effect different.

In addition, in order to facilitate the allocation of the first to third special effects when determining the effect pattern in the notification/effect control device 140 and to alleviate the occurrence of surpluses or deficiencies in the variable display time, it is technically significant to set the execution times of the second and third special effects to integer multiples of the execution time of the first special effect, which is set as the reference time.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the arrangement of the first to third special effects is determined at the start of the variation, but it is also possible to set all the first special effects and then replace some parts with the second and third special effects at the start of the second and third special effects. With this configuration, it is possible to change the effect pattern up until the start of the second or third special effect. For example, it is possible to change the effect pattern by taking into account subsequent reserved information that is newly added after the start of this play round, thereby strengthening the connection between previous and subsequent play rounds.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the first special effect in the special effect mode is configured to display a symbol combination corresponding to a complete miss as a provisional stop, but this is not limited to this. For example, a re-changing symbol combination (provisional stop symbol combination) may be displayed as a provisional stop, as in the normal effect mode. It is also possible to display either a re-changing symbol combination or a complete miss symbol combination as a provisional stop depending on the game result, etc.

Even if the first special effect in the special effect mode is configured to display a re-changing pattern combination as a temporary stop, it is preferable to differentiate it from the first special effect by configuring the second special effect and the third special effect to display a completely losing pattern combination as a temporary stop when the second special effect and the third special effect are executed during a game round.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the various special pattern tables are configured so that the second special effects do not occur consecutively, with the aim of increasing the chances of the first special effects occurring. It is also possible to change this and configure the various special pattern tables so that the second special effects can occur consecutively. Similarly, it is also possible to configure the various special pattern tables so that the third special effects can occur consecutively. It is also possible to configure the various special pattern tables so that the second special effects and the third special effects can occur consecutively. It is not intended to deny the combination of these patterns.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit of the first consecutive number of times in the special presentation mode is set in relation to the pseudo continuous variation display executed in the normal presentation mode, but this is not limited to the above. The upper limit may be set independently of the pseudo continuous variation display. In addition, the upper limit does not need to be a variable parameter, and may be a fixed parameter.

Incidentally, in the pseudo continuous variation display, four consecutive hits confirm a super reach or higher, and six consecutive hits confirm a jackpot, but whether or not to indicate the variation display mode and game results according to the number of consecutive hits is optional. The maximum number of consecutive hits in the pseudo continuous variation display may also be changed as desired.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, effects are displayed as part of a preview effect that spans game turns during the time-saving effect mode, and effects are also displayed in the special effect mode, but such effect displays can be omitted.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the effect display in the special performance mode is configured so that the number of continuous changes and the effect level may differ and the two do not necessarily match, but this can be changed so that the number of continuous changes and the effect level match.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, a transition from the special effect mode to the normal effect mode via the third special effect is illustrated, but it is also possible to impart a similar function to the second special effect. This increases the variety of effect patterns defined by the ninth to twelfth special pattern tables, and makes it possible to increase the opportunities for the first special effect to be executed.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the execution time of the first special effect is one type (2 sec), but multiple execution times of the first special effect may be provided. Even in this case, it is preferable to set the execution time taking into consideration the execution time of the game in the high frequency support mode when setting the execution time. For example, in the above first embodiment, the variable display time when no reach occurs is set to 1 sec when the reserved number is 2 to 4, and is set to 2 sec when the reserved number is 1. In order to increase the execution time of the first special effect, it is preferable to set the execution time of the added first special effect to 3 sec (variable display time 2 sec + provisional stop display time 1 sec) taking into consideration the next shortest variable display time of 2 sec + fixed display time of 1 sec.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, in the time-saving presentation mode corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and the special presentation mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the patterns are displayed in the reduced display area SE on the display screen 253a of the pattern display device 253, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to display the patterns in the variable display area ME, as in the normal presentation mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the number of parts (the number of times the first special effect can be executed) is determined by a calculation process in which the variable display time or the section before the reach display transition is divided by the reference time, and the first special effect to the third special effect are allocated based on the result of the determination. However, it is also possible to omit the calculation process by storing special pattern tables corresponding to various variable display times. However, when special pattern tables are provided for each variable display time, it is difficult to standardize the special pattern tables, and the number of tables tends to increase, compared to when special pattern tables are provided according to the number of parts. In particular, when the execution time of the reach display is different even for the same variable display time (see, for example, the second embodiment), such inconvenience becomes noticeable. In this way, storing special pattern tables according to the number of parts has the technical significance of contributing to a reduction in the amount of information stored in the notification/effect control device 140.

(16) In the above first to fourth embodiments, the confirmed display time in the low-frequency support mode is shorter than the confirmed display time in the high-frequency support mode. However, the relationship between the confirmed display times in each mode is arbitrary. For example, the confirmed display time in the low-frequency support mode and the confirmed display time in the high-frequency support mode may be the same.

(17) In the second embodiment described above, a configuration was given in which multiple times are set for the reach display when Super Reach D is executed in the special presentation mode, but the time required for the reach display is not limited to two, short and long, and can be any time. For example, it may be three, short, middle, and long, or it may be four or more.

In addition, for game times in which Super Reach D is executed, there are multiple timings from the start of a game time to the transition to reach display when compared with the same change display time, but the difference between these timings does not necessarily have to be the same length as the above-mentioned reference time. However, in order to use the difference in these timings to ensure the execution time of the first specified performance and thereby create a difference in the number of continuous changes (consecutive number of times) executed before the reach display, it is preferable to make the difference longer than the execution time (reference time) of the first specified performance. Note that, as with the second embodiment above, if this difference is set to be an integer multiple of the reference time, it is possible to preferably prevent the smoothness of the flow of the performance from being impaired when creating a difference in the number of continuous changes.

(18) In the third embodiment, the timing of transition to the reach display in the next game round is determined by taking into account the presentation pattern of the previous game round, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention may be configured to determine whether or not to consider the presentation pattern of the previous game round depending on the interval time from the previous game round. For example, if the next game round starts immediately after the end of the previous game round (i.e., if the reserved information for the next game round is secured by the end of the previous game round), the presentation pattern of the previous game round is considered, while if the next game round starts after an interval from the end of the previous game round (i.e., if the reserved information for the next game round is not secured by the end of the previous game round), the presentation pattern of the previous game round is not considered. Note that the criterion for determining whether or not to consider is not limited to the interval period = 0. The interval period used as the criterion may be changed arbitrarily as long as it is within a range in which the player recognizes that the previous game round and the subsequent game round are executed continuously.

(19) In the fifth embodiment, the waiting display is performed by oscillating the pattern in the scroll direction, but the specific form of the waiting display is arbitrary as long as it can at least indicate that the pattern is maintained on the pay line and may change again. For example, the pattern may be configured to repeatedly expand and contract on the pay line, the transparency of the pattern may be repeatedly changed between low and high states, or the pattern or an effect associated with the pattern may be made to blink (flash).

(20) In the time-saving presentation mode, the remaining number of plays maintained in the high-frequency support mode is basically not displayed, and in the special presentation mode, the remaining number of plays maintained in the special presentation mode is also not displayed accordingly, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure each presentation mode to display information corresponding to the remaining number of plays. For example, a counter indicating the remaining number of plays may be displayed on the display screen 253a. In the time-saving presentation mode, the value of this counter may be updated (e.g., subtracted) in accordance with the consumption of the number of plays, and in the special presentation mode, the value of the counter may be updated (e.g., subtracted) each time various presentations such as the first special presentation, the second special presentation (reach display non-development), and the third special presentation are executed. This allows the effect of making the time-saving presentation mode resemble the special presentation mode to be more effectively exhibited.

In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, if the possibility of ending the special effect mode is determined by lottery, after the counter reaches "0", it is advisable to display, for example, a message indicating that the special effect mode may end at any time (for example, a message such as "WARNING").

It is also possible to configure the special presentation mode to end when the counter value reaches "0", without causing the delays described above, but in this case, you should devise a presentation pattern for the last play round in the special presentation mode. For example, an event may occur in which the counter value reaches "0" during a play round, i.e., a transition to normal presentation mode may occur during a play round. In such a case, it is preferable to configure the portion up until the counter reaches "0" with the first to third special presentations that correspond to the special presentation mode, and the portion after the counter reaches "0" with presentations that correspond to the normal presentation mode.

(21) In each of the above embodiments, the minimum number of continuations in the high-frequency support mode is set to 10 times, but it is arbitrary as long as the minimum number of continuations in the high-frequency support mode is set to be greater than the maximum number of times that pseudo fluctuations (first special effect to third special effect, etc.) can be executed in one game. In each of the above embodiments, in a normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the longest variable display time in a game in which a reach does not occur is 17 seconds. In this variable display time, the number of parts is "9", and if the upper limit of the consecutive number is set to "3", the maximum number of executions of the pseudo fluctuation is 7 times. In contrast, the longest variable display time in a game in which a reach occurs is 28 seconds. In this variable display time, the number of remaining parts when considering the time of the reach display and the time of the branching effect is "6", and the maximum number of executions of the pseudo fluctuation is 6 when the upper limit of the consecutive number is set to "6". In such a case, it is advisable to set the above minimum number of continuations to 8 times or more, taking the former into consideration. In addition, it is advisable to set the minimum number of continuations when switching to the special presentation mode during normal gameplay that supports the low-frequency support mode to eight or more times.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, a lower limit is set for the number of times the special presentation mode continues (the number of times the pseudo fluctuation is executed), and once this lower limit is reached, whether or not the special presentation mode can continue is determined by lottery, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to configure the number of times the special presentation mode continues (the number of times the pseudo fluctuation is executed) to match the candidate number of times the high frequency support mode can continue.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, in a game round resulting in a jackpot, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed as a static display (confirmed display) after a reach display, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to configure a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result to be displayed as a static display (confirmed display) without a reach display in some of the game rounds resulting in a jackpot result. In such a configuration, the decision of whether to display a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result as a static display (confirmed display) after a reach display or to display a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result as a static display (confirmed display) without a reach display in a game round resulting in a jackpot result may be left to the notification/performance control device 140. For example, when a game round that will result in a jackpot is executed during a special effect mode, the number of times the first special effect was executed (i.e., the number of consecutive times the first special effect was executed before the game round) in the game round executed before the relevant game round (including at least the game round immediately preceding the relevant game round) is taken into consideration when deciding whether or not to display a reach display, and if it is decided to display a reach display, the presentation pattern for the relevant game round, i.e., the number of times the first special effect was executed, can be determined taking into consideration the number of times the first special effect was executed in the previous game round (i.e., the number of consecutive times the first special effect was executed before the relevant game round).

(24) In a configuration in which the first special effect is continued across game turns by linking the previous game turn with the subsequent game turn, it is possible to avoid the linking of both game turns based on the establishment of a predetermined avoidance condition during the interval between the two game turns, for example, to configure the effect pattern of the previous game turn not to be considered when determining the effect pattern in the subsequent game turn. The above-mentioned predetermined avoidance condition includes, for example, at least one of the following: the power of the gaming machine is turned off, the control mode of the gaming machine is switched to a power saving mode that consumes less power than normal, the symbol display device 253 is switched to a demo display, and a menu is displayed that adjusts the volume, etc. based on the player's operation. When the game is substantially interrupted, the configuration is such that the effect pattern of the previous game turn is not considered, thereby suitably improving the degree of freedom in setting the effect pattern in the subsequent game turn.

(25) When the first special effect is repeated with the second or third special effect in between, a correlation may be given between the number of consecutive first special effects before the second or third special effect and the number of consecutive first special effects after the second or third special effect. For example, when determining the number of consecutive first special effects in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result, a difference may be provided so that the proportion of the effect pattern that matches the previous number of consecutive times is higher than the proportion of the effect pattern that does not match, and when determining the number of consecutive first special effects in a game round not corresponding to a jackpot result, a difference may be provided so that the proportion of the effect pattern that matches the previous number of consecutive times is lower than the proportion of the effect pattern that matches. In such a configuration, it is preferable to increase the above differences so that a jackpot result is confirmed or there is a high expectation of a jackpot result when the later number of consecutive times matches the earlier number of consecutive times.

(26) In the special presentation mode, the presentation pattern for a game round is determined at the start of that game round. However, when multiple pieces of reserved information are stored, it is also possible to determine the presentation patterns for each game round related to the reserved information all at once. For example, when new reserved information is stored in the special presentation mode, the presentation patterns for each game round related to that reserved information and the reserved information stored earlier may be determined all at once. Applying the above configuration to a configuration in which special presentations are executed across multiple game rounds as shown in each of the above embodiments can contribute to optimizing the presentation patterns.

(27) In a configuration in which the likelihood of a jackpot result increases as the number of consecutive first special effects increases, it is advisable to provide a branching effect that determines whether the first special effect continues or not. That is, it is possible to provide an effect pattern in which the number of consecutive first special effects is continued with a branching effect in between, and an effect pattern in which the number of consecutive first special effects is not continued with a branching effect in between. With this type of configuration, when the first special effects are repeated, the first special effects can be separated into before and after by the branching effect, so that even when the first special effects are repeated, the number of consecutive times can be prevented from becoming excessively large.

(28) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol combination corresponding to a miss result is displayed (temporarily or temporarily) before the symbol combination is displayed as a part of the display effect. However, for example, in a part of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result (for example, the symbol combination displayed as a definite result in this game round) may be displayed (temporarily or temporarily) before the symbol combination is displayed as a definite result. For example, in a part of the case where the jackpot result is notified through a plurality of first special effects → second special effects → third special effects, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result (for example, the symbol combination displayed as a definite result in this game round) may be displayed (temporarily or temporarily) in at least one of the plurality of first special effects.

(29) When information such as a win or loss in a subsequent game round is specified before the start of the subsequent game round, the symbol combination that is finally stopped in a game round executed before the subsequent game round (the symbol combination that is displayed as confirmed) may be determined taking into consideration the specified result. For example, if the subsequent game round corresponds to a jackpot result, the symbol combination that is finally stopped in an earlier game round (corresponding to a loss result) may be a symbol combination that suggests or indicates that the subsequent game round will be a jackpot result.

In addition, as shown in the above modified example (26), when the presentation patterns for multiple play rounds are determined at once, it is also possible to take into account information such as the win/loss of the last play round among the multiple play rounds, and determine the symbol combinations (for example, the symbol combinations that are finally stopped or the symbol combinations that are provisionally stopped) for the play rounds that are executed prior to that play round.

(30) The number of reach displays executed during one game round is arbitrary, and it is also possible to configure the reach display to be executed multiple times. In this way, when executing multiple reach displays during one game round, the timing of development to each reach display and the number of first special effects executed until the development timing to each reach display may be stored in a patterned state according to the variable display time of the game round (for example, stored as a performance pattern table), and a performance pattern to be used may be selected from these patterns. With such a configuration, the performance function can be strengthened by providing a correspondence between previous and subsequent reach displays, while preventing the control load from becoming excessively large when determining the performance pattern.

For example, as shown in the above modified example (17), when the time for which the reach display is executed is set to short, medium, and long, and the execution time of the reach display is set to a difference, it is also possible to change the expectation of a jackpot result depending on the length of the time. When combining such a configuration with the configuration shown in this modified example, it is preferable to change the expectation of a jackpot result depending on the combination of the previous reach display and the subsequent reach display, thereby strengthening the cooperation between the previous and subsequent reach displays. Specifically, it is preferable to change the expectation of a jackpot result depending on how the length and type of the previous reach display are combined with the length and type of the subsequent reach display. For example, when the length of the previous reach display is set to long, which has a relatively high expectation, and the length of the subsequent reach display is set to short, which has a relatively low expectation, it is preferable to configure the expectation of a jackpot result to be extremely high compared to other combinations. According to the configuration shown in this modified example, the expectation of a jackpot result changes not only depending on the number of consecutive first special effects but also on the relationship between the reach displays executed multiple times, and further improvement in attention to the game can be expected.

(31) In each of the above embodiments, the notification/performance control device 140 and the display control device 410 are provided separately, but it is also possible to provide a single control device that integrates the functions of each of these control devices 140, 410.

(32) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines that differ from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple patterns circumferentially attached, and which start the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop by operating a stop switch, give the player a special reward, such as a medal payout, if a specific pattern or specific combination of patterns is formed on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating the effects, etc., as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
The following feature A group has been made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a changing picture on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will be generated, and the changing display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stopped state on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature A1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A bonus determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) corresponding to the bonus being awarded to the player;
In a gaming machine having a game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
The game round control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game round operation for each game round,
A performance execution means (a function of executing a variable display control process in the MPU 442 of the pattern display device 253 and the notification/performance control device 140) for executing a performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed,
As one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, a predetermined effect (e.g., a first special effect) is provided, the effect execution period of which is shorter than the operation period,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an execution count determination means (a function of determining a presentation pattern in MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140) that determines the number of times the specified presentation can be executed during a game round based on the operation period determined by the period determination means and the presentation execution period of the specified presentation, and determines the number of times the specified presentation will be executed in that game round based on the result of the determination.

According to feature A1, for example, the specified effect will be repeated to the extent possible during the relevant game round. In gaming machines, it is common for the operation period to be set variably for reasons such as preventing the game from becoming monotonous. According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of times the specified effect will be executed is determined after determining to what extent the specified effect can be executed based on the determined operation period and the execution period of the specified effect, so that the specified effect can be executed in accordance with various operation periods. This allows the specified effect to be effectively used to increase attention to the game.

The configuration shown in this characteristic is defined as "information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the operation port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player, and game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the grant determination means becomes a game round. In the gaming machine having a function of determining the operation period of the game-time operation for each game time, the game time control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining the operation period of the game-time operation for each game time, and a performance execution means (a function of executing a variable display control process in the pattern display device 253 and the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for executing a performance when the game-time operation is being performed, and as one of the performances executed by the performance execution means, a predetermined performance is provided whose performance execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the gaming machine has an execution number determination means (a function of determining a performance pattern in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for determining the number of times the predetermined performance is executed during a game time based on the operation period determined by the period determination means and the performance execution period of the predetermined performance.

Feature A2. An information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operation port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A bonus determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) corresponding to the bonus being awarded to the player;
In a gaming machine having a game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
The game round control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game round operation for each game round,
A performance execution means (a function of executing a variable display control process in the MPU 442 of the pattern display device 253 and the notification/performance control device 140) for executing a performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed,
As one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, a predetermined effect (e.g., a first special effect) is provided, the effect execution period of which is shorter than the operation period,
A number of times specifying means (a function of calculating the number of parts by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for specifying the number of times that the predetermined performance can be executed during a game based on the operation period determined by the period determination means and the performance execution period of the predetermined performance;
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an execution count determination means (a function of setting a presentation pattern in the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140) that determines the number of times the specified presentation will be executed during the game round based on the result of the determination by the number determination means.

According to feature A2, for example, the specified effect will be repeated to the extent possible during the relevant game round. In gaming machines, it is common for the operation period to be set variably for reasons such as preventing the game from becoming monotonous. According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of times the specified effect will be executed is determined after specifying to what extent the specified effect can be executed based on the determined operation period and the execution period of the specified effect, so that the specified effect can be executed in accordance with various operation periods. This allows the specified effect to be effectively used to increase attention to the game.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, characterized in that the execution count determination means is configured to determine the number of times the predetermined effect is to be executed based on the operation period, the effect execution period, and the determination result of the award determination means.

By determining the number of times that a predetermined effect is executed based on the result of the judgment by the grant judgment means, a relationship can be established between the judgment result and the number of times that it is executed. For example, by creating a difference in the number of times that it is executed between the case where the result corresponds to the grant and the case where the result does not correspond to the grant, it becomes possible to suggest the judgment result by the predetermined effect. This makes it possible to effectively exert the attention-increasing effect shown in feature A1, etc.

Feature A4. The execution count determination means is
A setting means (a function of setting an upper limit in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for setting an upper limit number (for example, a first consecutive number) based on the determination result by the grant determination means;
A gaming machine as described in feature A3, characterized in that it has a limiting means (a function of limiting the number of consecutive executions by MPU 442 of the notification/execution control device 140) that limits the number of times the specified performance is executed so that the number of times the specified performance is executed does not exceed the upper limit number of times.

In a configuration in which the number of times a predetermined performance is executed is determined according to the operating period, as shown in feature A1, etc., the number of times the predetermined performance is executed increases as the operating period becomes longer. However, if the relationship between the operating period and the number of times it is executed becomes too strong in this way, there is a concern that it will be difficult to reflect the results of the awarding judgment. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if an upper limit number is set based on the results of the awarding judgment and the number of times the predetermined performance is executed is determined within a range that does not exceed this upper limit, even if the number of times the predetermined performance can be executed is high, the actual number of times it is executed can be limited to a low number by the limiting means, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A5. The effect execution means is configured to suggest the expectation level, which is the award corresponding result, based on the number of times the predetermined effect is executed in succession,
The execution count determination means
A setting means (a function of setting an upper limit in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for setting an upper limit number (for example, a first consecutive number) based on the determination result by the grant determination means;
A gaming machine as described in feature A3, characterized in that it has a limiting means (a function of limiting the number of consecutive executions of the specified performance by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for limiting the number of times the specified performance is executed in succession so that the number of times the specified performance is executed in succession does not exceed the upper limit number of times.

In a configuration in which the number of times a predetermined effect is executed is determined according to the operating period, as shown in feature A1, etc., the number of consecutive times the predetermined effect is executed increases as the operating period becomes longer. However, if the relationship between the operating period and the number of times it is executed becomes too strong in this way, there is a concern that it will be difficult to reflect the results of the awarding judgment. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if an upper limit number is set based on the results of the awarding judgment and the number of consecutive times the predetermined effect is determined within a range that does not exceed the upper limit, even if the number of times the predetermined effect can be executed is high, the number of consecutive times can be adjusted to be low by the limiting means, and the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Note that "when the predetermined performances are executed consecutively" includes cases where a predetermined performance is executed again after the predetermined performance has ended, i.e., cases where the predetermined performances are executed consecutively without any intervening performances (for example, the second predetermined performance described below).

Feature A6. The predetermined effect is a first predetermined effect,
As one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, a second predetermined effect (for example, a second special effect or a third special effect) different from the first predetermined effect is provided,
The gaming machine described in feature A5 is characterized in that the limiting means is configured to limit the number of times the first predetermined performance is consecutively executed by executing the second predetermined performance when the number of times the first predetermined performance can be executed exceeds the upper limit number of times.

According to this feature, the first predetermined effect is limited so that it does not exceed the upper limit by inserting the second predetermined effect. In a configuration in which the number of consecutive first predetermined effects indicates the degree of expectation of a reward response result, the second predetermined effect is used to interrupt the succession of the first predetermined effects, thereby making it possible to clearly inform the player that the succession of the first predetermined effects has ended while increasing attention to the game.

The second predetermined effect includes, for example, a reach effect or a branching effect that branches into whether or not it develops into a reach effect.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned technical idea can also be applied to the above-mentioned feature A4. In this case, the configuration shown in this feature can be described as "a gaming machine described in feature A4, characterized in that the predetermined effect is a first predetermined effect, a second predetermined effect (e.g., a second special effect or a third special effect) different from the first predetermined effect is provided as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means, and the limiting means is configured to limit the number of times the first predetermined effect is executed by executing the second predetermined effect when the number of times the first predetermined effect can be executed exceeds the upper limit number of times."

Feature A7. The gaming machine described in Feature A6, characterized in that the limiting means has a means for dividing the first predetermined performance into one that is executed before the second predetermined performance and one that is executed after the second predetermined performance by inserting the second predetermined performance when the number of times the first predetermined performance can be executed exceeds the upper limit number of times.

By configuring the first predetermined performance group to include the second predetermined performance, it is possible to prevent the number of times the first predetermined performance is executed from becoming excessively small, while also preventing the number of consecutive executions from increasing.

As shown in Features A6 and A7, when the second predetermined performance is executed during a period in which the first predetermined performance can be executed, it is preferable to, for example, replace a part of the first predetermined performance group with the second predetermined performance.

Feature A8. The gaming machine described in Feature A7, characterized in that the limiting means has, as a mode when the second predetermined performance is interposed, a first mode in which the number of consecutive occurrences of the first predetermined performance executed before the second predetermined performance is greater than the number of consecutive occurrences of the first predetermined performance executed after the second predetermined performance, and a second mode in which the number of consecutive occurrences of the first predetermined performance executed before the second predetermined performance is less than the number of consecutive occurrences of the second predetermined performance executed after the second predetermined performance, and is configured to interpose the second predetermined performance more often in the second mode than in the first mode when the determination result of the award determination is the award correspondence result.

When the first predetermined performance group is divided into front and back by the second predetermined performance in the game round corresponding to the award determination result, the configuration is such that the number of consecutive first predetermined performances after the second predetermined performance is likely to be large, which can favorably increase the player's sense of anticipation in the process leading up to the announcement of the award response result. If the number of consecutive first predetermined performances can be made as large as possible (within the limits) in the part following the announcement of the award response result, it is possible to diversify the performances while encouraging the player to pay more attention to the announcement.

Feature A9. The gaming machine described in Feature A8, wherein the limiting means is configured to more frequently intervene the second predetermined performance in the first mode than in the second mode when the result of the determination by the award determination is not the award corresponding result.

When the first predetermined performance group is divided into front and back by the second predetermined performance in a game round that does not correspond to the award determination result, the effect shown in feature A8 above can be more effectively achieved by configuring it so that the number of consecutive first predetermined performances before the second predetermined performance is likely to be large.

Feature A10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A6 to A9, characterized in that the execution period of the second predetermined effect is configured to be an integer multiple of the execution period of the first predetermined effect.

As shown in feature A6, etc., when limiting the number of times (consecutive times) the first predetermined performance is performed using the second predetermined performance, the following effects can be expected by setting the execution period of the second predetermined performance to an integer multiple (x 1, 2, 3, ...) of the execution period of the first predetermined performance, as shown in this feature. In other words, it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of inconveniences such as the first predetermined performance not being executed properly due to the intervention of the second predetermined performance affecting the first predetermined performance, whose execution period would have been secured otherwise. Therefore, it is possible to avoid situations where the results specified in advance cannot be reused, and the number of times specified or the performance layout has to be redone. This is preferable in terms of smoothing the progression of the performance.

Feature A11. A related information storage means (a continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification/performance control device 140) is provided to store information regarding the execution status of the predetermined performance executed by the performance execution means,
The gaming machine described in any one of Features A5 to A10, characterized in that the limiting means has a special limiting means for limiting the number of times the specified effect is executed in succession from the previous game round when the effect in the game round prior to the current game round has ended with the specified effect, so that the number of times the specified effect is executed in succession from the previous game round does not exceed the upper limit number of times.

In a configuration in which a predetermined effect is repeatedly executed during a game round, there is a possibility that a predetermined effect executed in a previous game round and a predetermined effect executed in a subsequent game round may appear to be continuous. Therefore, if a predetermined effect is executed at the end of a previous game round, the number of consecutive occurrences, including this predetermined effect, is set not to exceed a predetermined number, thereby preventing the predetermined effects from appearing to be continuous beyond a limit. This is preferable in terms of reducing confusion for the player.

When combined with features A6 to A10, the "predetermined effect" shown in this feature can be regarded as the "first predetermined effect."

Feature A12. The gaming machine described in Feature A11, wherein the special restriction means is configured to impose the restriction if the interval period from the end of the specified performance in the previous game round to the start of the specified performance in the current game round does not exceed a reference period.

When a predetermined effect is performed in each of the previous and subsequent play rounds, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous is likely to depend on the period from when the predetermined effect ends in the previous play round to when the predetermined effect starts in the next play round. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the device to impose the above restriction when the interval period does not exceed the reference period, it is possible to optimally achieve the effect shown in feature A11.

Feature A13: The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
The grant determination means is configured to sequentially perform the grant determination for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
The gaming machine described in feature A11, wherein the special restriction means is configured to impose the restriction when the special information corresponding to the next game round is stored before the previous game round ends.

When a predetermined effect is performed in each of the previous and next game rounds, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous is likely to depend on the period from when the predetermined effect ends in the previous game round to when the predetermined effect starts in the next game round. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the device to impose the above restriction if special information corresponding to the next game round is stored before the previous game round ends, it is possible to optimally achieve the effect shown in feature A11.

Feature A14: A related information storage means (a continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification/performance control device 140) is provided to store information regarding the execution status of the predetermined performance executed by the performance execution means,
The gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A10, characterized in that the execution count determination means is configured to determine the number of times the specified effect will be executed in a current game round based on the specific result and the execution status of the specified effect in the game round prior to the current game round.

If it becomes possible to link a predetermined effect executed in a current play round with a predetermined effect executed in a previous play round, it will be possible to diversify the occurrence patterns of the predetermined effects and improve the freedom of setting the predetermined effects compared to when dealing with the current play round alone. In this way, using a predetermined effect from a previous play round is advantageous in terms of increasing attention to the game through the predetermined effects.

When combined with features A6 to A10, the "predetermined effect" shown in this feature can be regarded as the "first predetermined effect."

Feature A15. The gaming machine described in Feature A14, characterized in that the execution count determination means is configured to determine the number of times the predetermined effect will be executed in the current game round based on the identification result and the execution status of the predetermined effect in the game round prior to the current game round, if the interval period from when the predetermined effect ended in the previous game round to when the predetermined effect starts in the current game round does not exceed a reference period (e.g., the same time as the confirmed display time: 2 sec).

When a predetermined effect is performed in each of the previous and subsequent play rounds, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous is likely to depend on the period from when the predetermined effect ends in the previous play round to when the predetermined effect starts in the next play round. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the game rounds to work together when the interval period does not exceed the reference period, it is possible to optimally achieve the effect shown in feature A14.

Feature A16: The acquired information storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means,
The grant determination means is configured to sequentially perform the grant determination for the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
The gaming machine described in feature A14 is characterized in that the execution count determination means is configured to determine the number of times to execute the specified presentation in the current game round based on the specific result and the execution status of the specified presentation in the game round prior to the current game round, if the special information corresponding to the next game round is stored before the end of the previous game round.

When a predetermined effect is performed in each of the previous and next game rounds, whether or not the predetermined effects appear to be continuous is likely to depend on the period from when the predetermined effect in the previous game round ends until when the predetermined effect in the next game round starts. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by configuring the game rounds to work together when special information corresponding to the next game round is stored before the previous game round ends, it is possible to optimally achieve the effect shown in feature A14.

Feature A17. A destination specification means for specifying information corresponding to a judgment result when the specific special information acquired by the information acquisition means becomes a target of the grant judgment at a timing before the specific special information becomes a target of the grant judgment,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A16, characterized in that the execution count determination means determines the number of times the specified effect will be executed in a game play prior to the game play that is the target of determination by the destination determination means, based on the determination result by the destination determination means.

When a predetermined effect is repeated in a single game turn alone, it is expected that there will be stricter restrictions on the number of times the predetermined effect is executed and the number of consecutive times. For example, even if an attempt is made to increase the number of times the predetermined effect is executed when the game turn that is the subject of pre-identification corresponds to the grant corresponding result, there may be cases in which a sufficient number of executions cannot be secured depending on the operation period of that game turn. In this regard, as shown in this feature, when determining the number of times to execute the predetermined effect in the game turn prior to the game turn that is the subject of pre-identification (the current game turn), a configuration is adopted in which pre-identification information related to the game turn that is the subject of pre-identification is taken into account, thereby realizing coordination between the previous and following game turns and making it possible to prepare in advance for, for example, a lack of operation period as described above.

Feature A18. The destination specification means includes a means for specifying the operation period of the game related to the predetermined special information, and a means for specifying the number of times that the predetermined performance can be executed in the game related to the predetermined special information based on the operation period;
The gaming machine described in feature A17, wherein the effect execution means has a means for executing the specified effect at least at the end of the current game round when the number of times the specified effect can be executed in the game round related to the specified special information is below the specified number.

As shown in feature A18, if the number of times that the specified effect can be executed in a later play round falls below the specified number, the specified effect is executed at least at the end of the current play round, so that the number of times the specified effect is executed from the current play round to the later play rounds can be brought closer to the specified number.

Feature A19: The information acquisition means acquires the special information based on a ball entering the ball entry section,
As game states, a first game state (low frequency support mode) and a second game state (high frequency support mode) in which it is easier to score a ball into the ball scoring section than in the first game state are provided,
The operation period (variable display time) and the notification period (fixed display time) of the game operation are configured to be shorter in the second game state than in the first game state,
The effect execution means has a variable display means (pattern display device 253) that variably displays a pattern on a display screen (display screen 253a), and includes a variable display that variably displays a pattern on the display screen as the predetermined effect, and a stop display that stops and displays the pattern via the variable display,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A18, characterized in that the variable display period of the image in the specified presentation coincides with the operation period in the second gaming state, and the stationary display period of the image in the specified presentation coincides with the notification period in the second gaming state.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game progress speed can be changed between the first game state and the second game state, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous. In addition, in the first game state, it is possible to change the game progress speed in a pseudo manner while maintaining that game state, which contributes to preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Feature A20. In the second game state, the display screen starts displaying a variable pattern in accordance with the start of the game operation, and the variable display of the pattern is maintained until the end of the game operation, and then a pattern corresponding to the result of the award determination by the award determination means is displayed in a stopped state.
The gaming machine described in feature A19, characterized in that the effect execution means has, as a means for stopping and displaying a pattern in the specified effect, a means for stopping and displaying a pattern corresponding to the result of the award determination when the specified effect is executed in response to the end of a game round, and a means for stopping and displaying a pattern not corresponding to the result of the award determination when the specified effect is executed in response to something other than the end of a game round.

This characteristic configuration allows a picture display in the first game state to be reproduced that is similar to the picture display in the second game state. In other words, even if the game state remains the first game state, the appearance can be made to look as if it is in the second game state. With this configuration, it is possible to give the impression that the game progress speed is changing without changing the game state, which contributes to preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Feature A21. The gaming machine described in Feature A19 or Feature A20, characterized in that the predetermined presentation is the same as the game round presentation executed in each game round in the second gaming state.

As shown by this feature, by using the game play presentation in the second game state for a specified presentation, the effect of resembling the second game state can be more effectively achieved.

<Characteristics Group B>
The following feature B group has been made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a changing picture on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the changing display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stopped state on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature B1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A transition determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to transition information (jackpot information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (e.g., an opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than usual, based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a transition corresponding result that corresponds to the transition information;
A display means (a pattern display device 253) having a display screen (a display screen 253a);
A display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) is provided for displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying a picture combination corresponding to the judgment result,
When the result of the judgment by the judgment means is the transition corresponding result, a predetermined pattern combination (a pattern combination corresponding to a big win result) corresponding to the transition corresponding result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special game state.
As one of the variable display modes of the patterns on the display screen, a special variable display mode (e.g., Super Reach D) is provided in which the patterns displayed in a stopped state on the display screen constitute a part of the predetermined pattern combination and transition to a ready state in which at least a part of the patterns is being variably displayed;
A display effect to be executed before the reach state is reached in a game round corresponding to the special variable display mode is a predetermined effect (e.g., a first special effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the shortest period until the reach state is reached,
The display control means
An execution count determination means (a function of determining a performance pattern by the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) for determining the number of times that the predetermined performance can be executed during a game round based on the period until the game round transitions to the reach state in the game round corresponding to the special variable display mode and the performance execution period of the predetermined performance, and for determining the number of times that the predetermined performance is to be executed in the game round based on the result of the determination;
A gaming machine characterized by having an effect execution means (a function of executing a first special effect in the MPU 442 of the notification/effect control device 140) that executes the specified effect based on a decision by the execution count decision means before the reach state is reached.

According to feature B1, the number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed before the transition to the reach state is identified based on the period until the transition to the reach state and the performance execution period of the predetermined effect, and the number of times that the predetermined effect is executed is determined based on the identification result. As a result, the predetermined effect is repeated, for example, to the extent possible, before the transition to the reach state. It is common for gaming machines to be configured to transition to the reach state at various times for reasons such as preventing the game from becoming monotonous. According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of times that the predetermined effect is executed is determined after identifying the extent to which the predetermined effect can be executed based on the determined transition timing to the reach state, so that the predetermined effect can be executed repeatedly in accordance with various transition modes to the reach state. This allows the predetermined effect to be effectively used to increase attention to the game.

Feature B2. The gaming machine described in Feature B1, wherein the performance execution means is configured to indicate the likelihood of transitioning to the reach state based on the number of times the predetermined performance is executed.

The number of times the specified effect is executed is related to the transition to a reach state. In such a configuration, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the specified effect. Here, if it is possible to respond to various transition timings to a reach state by combining it with feature B1, the suggestive function of the specified effect can be effectively utilized. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Feature B3. The display control means is configured to suggest the degree of expectation, which is the transition response result, based on the number of times the predetermined performance is executed in succession,
As the special variable display mode, a first special variable display mode and a second special variable display mode having a longer period until the reach state is transitioned to than the first special variable display mode are provided,
A gaming machine as described in feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that when the judgment result by the judgment means is the transition response result, the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the first special variable display mode, and when the judgment result by the judgment means is not the transition response result, the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the second special variable display mode.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when there is a transition response result, the period until transition to a reach state is likely to be longer than when there is no transition response result, making it possible to increase the number of times the specified performance is executed. In contrast, when there is no transition response result, the period until transition to a reach state is likely to be shorter, and the number of times the specified performance is executed is reduced. In this manner, according to the configuration, an increase in the number of times the specified performance is executed increases the possibility of a transition response result, and a decrease in the number of times the specified performance is executed decreases the possibility of a transition response result, and a relationship is given between the result of the transition determination and the number of times the specified performance is executed.

Feature B4. The gaming machine described in Feature B3, characterized in that the difference between the period until the transition to the reach state in the first special variable display mode and the period until the transition to the reach state in the second special variable display mode is configured to be an integer multiple of the performance execution period of the specified performance.

By making the difference in the timing of transition to the reach state an integer multiple (x1, 2, 3, etc.) of the performance execution period of the specified performance, the execution period of the specified performance can be secured by that difference, and the configuration can be prevented from becoming complicated when differentiating between the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode while smoothing the performance progression.

Feature B5: The display control means has a transition timing determination means for determining a timing for transitioning to the reach state based on a result of the determination by the transition determination means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the execution count determination means is configured to determine the period until transition to the reach state based on the transition timing determined by the transition timing determination means.

Various settings for the timing of transition to the reach state are preferable in preventing the game presentation from becoming monotonous and increasing attention to the game. However, if the transition timing is varied, the number of times that a specified presentation can be executed may also vary accordingly. Therefore, as shown in feature B4, in a configuration in which the timing of transition to the reach state is determined based on the transition judgment result, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by specifying the period until transition to the reach state based on that result, and determining the number of times that a specified presentation will be executed based on that specification result.

Feature B6: The execution count determination means is a first execution count determination means,
a second execution number determination means for determining the number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed during a game round based on a period until the game round ends and the execution period of the predetermined effect in a game round not corresponding to the special variable display mode, and determining the number of times that the predetermined effect can be executed in the game round based on the determination result;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B5, characterized in that the performance execution means is configured to execute the specified performance based on a determination by the first execution count determination means and a determination by the second execution count determination means.

According to feature B6, in a game round that does not transition to a reach state, the number of times the specified effect is executed is determined based on the execution period of that game round and the execution period of the specified effect. By configuring the specified effect to be executed even in a game round that does not transition to a reach state, it is possible to contribute to increasing the attention of players who are hoping for a transition to a reach state to the game.

When applying the technical idea shown in Feature Group A, the "second execution count determination means" shown in this feature can be the "execution count determination means" shown in Feature Group A.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature A to Feature B described above.

<Characteristics Group C>
The following feature C group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a changing picture on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the changing display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stopped state on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature C1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operation port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A bonus determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a bonus corresponding result (e.g., a jackpot result) that is to be awarded to the player;
In a gaming machine having a game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (an operating port display section of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
The game round control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game round operation for each game round,
A performance execution means (a function of executing a variable display control process in the MPU 442 of the pattern display device 253 and the notification/performance control device 140) for executing a performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed,
A first predetermined effect (e.g., a first special effect) and a second predetermined effect (e.g., a second special effect or a third special effect) are provided as effects executed by the effect execution means, the effect execution period of which is shorter than the operation period, and when the first predetermined effect is executed consecutively without the second predetermined effect being interposed, the number of consecutive executions indicates the degree of expectation, which is the award corresponding result,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means has a means for dividing the first predetermined effect into a first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect and a first predetermined effect executed after the second predetermined effect by interposing the second predetermined effect between the first predetermined effects when the first predetermined effect is executed multiple times during one game round.

In a configuration in which the expectation level, which is the result of the award, is indicated by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects, there is a concern that the deviation between the expected level suggested by excessive consecutive first predetermined effects and the actual game result will become large. Here, it is possible to simply not perform the first predetermined effects, or to replace the beginning or end of the first predetermined effects group with the second predetermined effects, but such a configuration will not be able to effectively demonstrate the effect of the first predetermined effects. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the second predetermined effects are inserted to divide the first predetermined effects group into front and back, it is possible to prevent the number of consecutive first predetermined effects from becoming excessively large while preventing the number of times the first predetermined effects are executed from becoming excessively small. This makes it possible to prevent the above deviation while ensuring the effect of the first predetermined effects. Therefore, the effect of increasing attention to the game by the first predetermined effects can be preferably demonstrated.

The configuration shown in this characteristic is defined as "a gaming machine having information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for the operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, grant determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning or losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to the player, and game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for the operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, with the end of the game round operation being counted as one game round when a notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the grant determination means is obtained after the start of the game round operation, The game machine is characterized in that the game round control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining an operation period of the game round operation for each game round, and has a performance execution means (a function of executing a variable display control process in the MPU 442 of the pattern display device 253 and the notification/performance control device 140) for executing a performance in parallel with the game round operation when the game round operation is being performed, and a first predetermined performance (e.g., a first special performance) and a second predetermined performance (e.g., a second special performance or a third special performance) are provided as performances executed by the performance execution means, the performance execution period of which is shorter than the operation period, and the performance execution means has a means for dividing the first predetermined performance into a first predetermined performance executed before the second predetermined performance and a first predetermined performance executed after the second predetermined performance by interposing the second predetermined performance between the first predetermined performances when the first predetermined performance is executed multiple times during one game round. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown below in Features C2 to C11 to this configuration.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, characterized in that the effect execution means has a means for setting an upper limit on the number of consecutive occurrences of the first predetermined effect based on the result of the determination by the award determination means, and is configured to divide the first predetermined effect into a first predetermined effect executed before the second predetermined effect and a first effect executed after the second predetermined effect by inserting the second predetermined effect when the upper limit is likely to be reached.

By setting an upper limit on the number of consecutive first predetermined effects depending on the result of the awarding judgment, and by configuring the second predetermined effect to intervene when the upper limit is exceeded, the first predetermined effect can be divided into a first half and a second half, for example, and the first predetermined effect can be suitably prevented from being excessively repeated in a manner that does not match the result of the awarding judgment.

Feature C3. The gaming machine described in Feature C1 or Feature C2, characterized in that the execution period of the second predetermined effect is set to be an integer multiple of the execution period of the first predetermined effect.

If one were to simply insert a second predetermined performance into a group of first predetermined performances, the interruption of the second predetermined performance could result in an excess or deficiency in the performance period. This could be a factor in impairing the smoothness of the performance progression. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by making the execution period of the second predetermined performance an integer multiple of the execution period of the first predetermined performance, it is possible to execute the second predetermined performance in place of a predetermined number of first predetermined performances, thereby suppressing the above-mentioned excess or deficiency. This ensures the smoothness of the performance progression.

Feature C4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C3, characterized in that, as a setting mode for setting an intervening location of the second predetermined performance when the group of first predetermined performances is divided into front and rear by the second predetermined performance, there is provided a first setting mode in which the number of first predetermined performances executed before the second predetermined performance is greater than the number of first predetermined performances executed after, and a second setting mode in which the number of first predetermined performances executed before the second predetermined performance is less than the number of first predetermined performances executed after.

When a second predetermined performance is inserted, the more the number of first predetermined performances executed after the second predetermined performance will be, the more the number of times the first predetermined performance will be executed after the second predetermined performance will be, and the more the number of times the second predetermined performance will be executed after the second predetermined performance will be, by inserting the second predetermined performance closer to the front, the fewer the number of times the second predetermined performance will be executed after the second predetermined performance. By creating such a difference, the first predetermined performance group is divided into front and back, and the insertion of the second predetermined performance will effectively prevent the performance from becoming monotonous.

Feature C5. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, characterized in that when the determination result by the award determination means is the award corresponding result, the second setting mode is more likely to occur than the first setting mode.

According to the configuration shown in this characteristic, when the result corresponds to a grant, the first predetermined effect is more likely to continue in the latter half of a game round, for example. In this way, according to a configuration in which the intervention position of the second predetermined effect is determined so as to correspond to the game result, the intervention of the second predetermined effect divides the first predetermined effect into a first half and a second half, while strengthening the connection between successive first predetermined effects, for example, an effect of a reach display, and the original function of suggesting the degree of expectation by the repetition of the first predetermined effect can be optimally guaranteed.

Feature C6. An information display means (e.g., an effect displayed on the display screen 253a) for displaying frequency information corresponding to the number of times the first predetermined effect is consecutive;
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for resetting the number of times corresponding information displayed on the information display means when the first specified performance is executed after the second specified performance is executed.

By displaying the number of times corresponding information when the first predetermined performance occurs consecutively, it becomes easier to know how many times in a row it has occurred, even if you miss something. In this configuration, if the second predetermined performance intervenes, the number of times corresponding information is reset to clearly show that the succession of the first predetermined performances has stopped. This makes it clear that the second predetermined performance is the trigger for stopping the succession of the first predetermined performances, and prevents the content from becoming difficult to understand due to the complexity of the performances.

Feature C7. A display means (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
A display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) is provided for displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying a picture combination corresponding to the result of the award determination.
When the result of the determination by the award determination means is the award corresponding result, a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the award corresponding result is stopped and displayed on the display screen.
the effect execution means performs a display effect using a picture displayed on the display screen,
The gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that the first predetermined performance is configured to variably display the images on the display screen so that the images form a combination that does not correspond to the award corresponding result, and to display them in a provisionally stopped state on the display screen.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by executing the first predetermined effect multiple times during one game round, it is possible to make it appear as if the speed at which the game progresses has changed significantly. However, in such a configuration, the first predetermined effect is repeated in short cycles, which may cause the game to become monotonous. Therefore, by inserting the second predetermined effect into the group of first predetermined effects, the monotony of the game can be suppressed. In particular, in a configuration in which the succession of the first predetermined effects increases the expectation level of the award corresponding result as shown in feature C1, excessive succession of the first predetermined effects is undesirable because it can confuse the player. In this regard, the occurrence of such inconveniences can be suppressed suitably by adopting a configuration in which the succession of the first predetermined effects is stopped by the intervention of the second predetermined effect.

Feature C8. An information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operation port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A grant determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a granting result corresponding to granting a bonus to a player;
In a gaming machine having a game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
The game round control means has a period determination means for determining an operation period of the game round operation for each game round (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A performance execution means (a function of executing a variable display control process in the MPU 442 of the pattern display device 253 and the notification/performance control device 140) for executing a performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed,
A first predetermined effect (e.g., a first special effect) and a second predetermined effect (e.g., a second special effect or a third special effect) are provided as effects executed by the effect execution means, the effect execution period of which is shorter than the operation period, and when the first predetermined effect is executed consecutively without the second predetermined effect being interposed, the number of consecutive executions indicates the degree of expectation of the transition response result,
The performance execution means includes:
When the first predetermined performance is executed a plurality of times during one game, a means for dividing the first predetermined performance into a first predetermined performance executed before the second predetermined performance and a first predetermined performance executed after the second predetermined performance by interposing the second predetermined performance between the first predetermined performances;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the first predetermined performance is executed multiple times during one game round, the gaming machine has a means for consecutively executing the first predetermined performances by placing the second predetermined performance before or after the first predetermined performances.

In a configuration in which the degree of expectation, which is the result of the corresponding award, is indicated by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects as shown in feature C8, there is a concern that excessive consecutive first predetermined effects will cause a large discrepancy between the degree of expectation suggested by the actual game result. Here, it is possible to configure the game so that the first predetermined effect is not performed, but such a configuration will not effectively demonstrate the presentation effect of the first predetermined effect. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the number of consecutive effects is prevented from becoming excessively large by intervening with the second predetermined effect, the above-mentioned discrepancy can be suppressed while ensuring the presentation effect of the first predetermined effect. This allows the first predetermined effect to be effectively used to increase attention to the game.

Feature C9. An information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operation port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A grant determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a granting result corresponding to granting a bonus to a player;
In a gaming machine having a game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (a display section for an operating port of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
The game round control means has a period determination means for determining an operation period of the game round operation for each game round (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162),
A performance execution means (a function of executing a variable display control process in the MPU 442 of the pattern display device 253 and the notification/performance control device 140) for executing a performance in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed,
A first predetermined effect (e.g., a first special effect) and a second predetermined effect (e.g., a second special effect or a third special effect) are provided as effects executed by the effect execution means, the effect execution period of which is shorter than the operation period, and when the first predetermined effect is executed consecutively without the second predetermined effect being interposed, the number of consecutive executions indicates the degree of expectation of the transition response result,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance execution means has a means for executing the second predetermined performance between the first predetermined performances when the second predetermined performance is executed in one game round after the first predetermined performance is executed multiple times during the same game round.

In a configuration in which the degree of expectation, which is the result of the corresponding award, is indicated by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects as shown in feature C9, there is a concern that excessive succession of the first predetermined effects will result in a large discrepancy between the degree of expectation suggested by the actual game result. Here, it is possible to configure the game so that the first predetermined effects are not performed, but such a configuration will not be able to effectively demonstrate the presentation effect of the first predetermined effects. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which the number of consecutive effects is prevented from becoming excessively large by intervening the second predetermined effects, the above-mentioned discrepancy can be suppressed while ensuring the presentation effect of the first predetermined effects. This allows the first predetermined effects to be effectively used to increase attention to the game.

Feature C10. As a game state, a first game state and a second game state in which the operation period of the game operation is shorter than that of the first game state are provided;
The first predetermined effect is an effect that is executed once in each game in the second game state,
In the first gaming state, the operation period of each game is configured to execute the first predetermined performance a plurality of times,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C9, characterized in that the performance execution means is configured to execute the first specified performance multiple times in each game when the first game state is activated.

According to feature C10, in the first gaming state, the first predetermined presentation can be repeated during one game round to make it appear as if the game has entered the second gaming state. In other words, it is possible to significantly change the rhythm of the game progress by making it appear as if the game progress has suddenly accelerated. This prevents the game from becoming monotonous, and more effectively increases the interest in the game.

Feature C11. The gaming machine according to any one of Features C1 to C10, characterized in that the performance execution means has a means for dividing the first predetermined performance into a first predetermined performance executed before the second predetermined performance and a first predetermined performance executed after the second predetermined performance by interposing the second predetermined performance between the first predetermined performances when the first predetermined performance is executed multiple times during one game round, and executing the second predetermined performance after the first predetermined performance executed after the latter.

As shown in feature C1, etc., in a configuration in which the first predetermined performances are executed consecutively, the first predetermined performances may be executed consecutively across previous and subsequent game rounds, which may result in an excessive number of consecutive first predetermined performances. For example, when determining the outline of the performance in a later game round, the execution status of the first predetermined performance in a previous game round may be taken into consideration to prevent the number of consecutive first predetermined performances from becoming excessive. However, there is a concern that a configuration in which the outline of the performance is always determined by taking into consideration the previous game round may increase the control load or increase the constraints on the determination of the outline of the performance. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the first predetermined performance is divided into front and back by the second predetermined performance, it is possible to end the performance of one game round with the second predetermined performance. Therefore, the impact on the later game rounds is reduced, and the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above can be preferably suppressed.

As shown in this feature, if the second predetermined effect is executed multiple times during one game round, the other second predetermined effects (the first second predetermined effect) except for the last second predetermined effect (the second second predetermined effect) may not correspond to the grant corresponding result.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group B to Feature Group C described above.

<Feature D group>
The following feature D group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a changing picture on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will be generated, and the changing display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stopped state on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature D1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (a function for executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than usual, based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a transition correspondence result which corresponds to the transition information;
A display unit (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
A display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) is provided for displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen in a variable manner, and then displaying the pictures in a static manner in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means.
When the determination result by the determination means is the transition corresponding result, a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the transition corresponding result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before transition to the special game state,
As a special variable display mode (for example, Super Reach D) which is one of the variable display modes of the picture on the display screen,
A first special variable display mode (short) in which the picture displayed on the display screen before the picture combination corresponding to the judgment result is displayed, constitutes a part of the predetermined picture combination, and transitions to a ready state in which at least a part of the picture is being displayed in a variable manner;
A second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of transition to the reach state is later than that of the first special variable display mode is provided,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the judgment result by the judgment means is the transition response result, the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the second special variable display mode, and when the judgment result by the judgment means is not the transition response result, the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the first special variable display mode.

When the image is displayed variably in the special variable display mode, the timing of the transition to the reach state changes depending on the result of the transition judgment. This makes it possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. In particular, by actively delaying the timing of the transition to the reach state when the transition response result is reached, it is possible to optimally secure a period of time for the execution of effects that build anticipation for the transition to the reach state. This can contribute to increasing attention to the game in the period before the transition to the reach state.

The configuration shown in this characteristic is defined as "information acquisition means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function for executing a winning process for the operation port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (reserved ball storage area 432), judgment means for judging whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to transition information (a function for executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a result of the judgment by the judgment means for judging the transition information." a game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than usual based on the transition response result which corresponds to the above, a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a), and a display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols on the display screen and then stopping and displaying the symbols in a combination corresponding to the judgment result by the judgment means, When the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result, a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the transition response result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special game state, and a first special variable display mode (short) in which the picture displayed on the display screen transitions to a reach state in which the picture displayed on the display screen constitutes part of the predetermined picture combination and at least a part of the picture is being variably displayed before the picture combination corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed on the display screen (for example, Super Reach D) and a second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of transition to the reach state is later than the first special variable display mode are provided, and when the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result, the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set than when the transition response result is not, and when the determination result by the determination means is not the transition response result, the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than when the transition response result is not.

The configuration shown in this characteristic is defined as "information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function for executing a winning process for the operation port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (reserved ball storage area 432), judgment means for judging whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to transition information (a function for executing a lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and a judgment result by the judgment means for judging the transition information. a game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than usual based on a transition response result that corresponds to the notification, a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a), and a display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 162) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols on the display screen and then displaying the symbols in a stopped state in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means 410), and when the result of the determination by the determination means is the transition response result, a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the transition response result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special game state, and a special variable display mode, which is one of the variable display modes of the pictures on the display screen, is provided with a first special variable display mode (short) in which the pictures stopped and displayed on the display screen transition to a reach state in which the pictures that are stopped and displayed on the display screen constitute part of the predetermined picture combination and at least some of the pictures are being variably displayed before the picture combination corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed, and a second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of transition to the reach state is later than the first special variable display mode, and the variable display means has a means for setting the variable display mode of the pictures to the first special variable display mode when the result of the determination by the determination means is the transition response result, and a means for setting the variable display mode of the pictures to the second special variable display mode when the result of the determination by the determination means is not the transition response result.

Feature D2. An information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (a function for executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a transition correspondence result which corresponds to the transition information;
A display unit (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
A display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) is provided for displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the pictures in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means.
When the determination result by the determination means is the transition corresponding result, a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the transition corresponding result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before transition to the special game state,
As a special variable display mode of the picture executed on the display screen (for example, Super Reach D),
A first special variable display mode (short) in which the picture displayed on the display screen before the picture combination corresponding to the judgment result is displayed, constitutes a part of the predetermined picture combination, and transitions to a ready state in which at least a part of the picture is being displayed in a variable manner;
A second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of transition to the reach state is later than that of the first special variable display mode is provided,
As setting modes of the variable display mode in the normal game state, a first setting mode (normal presentation mode) and a second setting mode (special presentation mode) are provided,
In the first setting mode, when the determination result by the determination means is the transition response result, the first special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the second special variable display mode,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second setting mode, when the judgment result by the judgment means is the transition response result, the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the first special variable display mode.

When the image is displayed variably in the special variable display mode, the timing of the transition to the reach state changes depending on the transition response result and the setting mode. This makes it possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. In particular, in the first setting mode, by configuring the transition to the reach state to be more likely to occur sooner if the transition response result is found, it is possible to preferably secure the execution period of effects, etc. in the reach state, and in the second setting mode, by configuring the transition to the reach state to be more likely to occur late if the transition response result is found, it is possible to preferably secure the execution period of effects, etc. that encourage the transition to the reach state. This can contribute to increasing attention to the game both during the reach state and before the transition to the reach state.

The configuration shown in this characteristic is defined as "information acquisition means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function for executing a winning process for the operation port in MPU 402 of main control device 162), acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means (reserved ball storage area 432), judgment means for judging whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to transition information (a function for executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in MPU 402 of main control device 162), and a function for judging whether the result of the judgment by the judgment means corresponds to the transition information." a game state transition means (a function of executing game state transition processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on a transition response result which corresponds to the information; a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a); and a display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols on the display screen and then stopping and displaying the symbols in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. and when the result of the determination by the determination means is the transition response result, a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the transition response result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special game state, and as a special variable display mode of the picture executed on the display screen (for example, Super Reach D), a first special variable display mode (short) in which the picture stopped and displayed on the display screen transitions to a reach state in which the picture that is stopped and displayed on the display screen constitutes part of the predetermined picture combination and at least a part of the picture is being variably displayed before the picture combination corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed, and a second special variable display mode (long) in which the timing of transition to the reach state is later than that of the first special variable display mode are provided, and a normal setting mode (normal presentation mode) and a special setting mode (special presentation mode) are provided as setting modes of the variable display mode in the normal game state, and in the special setting mode, when the result of the determination by the determination means is the transition response result, the second special variable display mode is more likely to be set than the first special variable display mode.

Feature D3. The first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode are configured to be able to execute a predetermined performance (for example, a first special performance) multiple times, which is configured to have a predetermined execution period until the reach state is reached, and when the predetermined performance is executed continuously, the number of executions indicates the expectation level, which is the transition response result,
A gaming machine described in feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that the second special variable display mode is set so that the period from the start of the variable display to the transition to the reach state is longer than that of the first special variable display mode.

According to feature D3, in the second special variable display mode, the period from the start of the variable display to the transition to the reach state is longer than in the first special variable display mode. In other words, in the case of a transition response result, the transition to the reach state is delayed, thereby increasing the opportunities for the execution of a specified performance during that period.

Feature D4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features D1 to D3, characterized in that the first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode are configured to have the same period until the picture combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means is stopped and displayed.

By making the period the same but varying the timing of the transition to the reach state, it is possible to achieve the effects shown in feature D1, etc., while minimizing the complexity of the gaming machine's configuration.

Feature D5. The first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode are configured to be able to execute a predetermined performance multiple times, the execution period of which is a predetermined period, until the reach state is reached, and when the predetermined performance is executed continuously, the number of executions indicates the expectation level, which is the transition response result,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that the difference between the timing of transition to the reach state in the first special variable display mode and the timing of transition to the reach state in the second special variable display mode is set to be an integer multiple of the specified period.

As shown in feature D5, if the difference in transition timing is set to be an integer multiple of the specified period, the specified performance can be executed an integer multiple more times. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent excess or deficiency in the execution time of the performance due to differences in the number of times the specified performance is executed, that is, distortion of the flow of the performance in any of the special display modes. This ensures smooth progression of the performance.

Feature D6. The first special variable display mode and the second special variable display mode are configured to be able to execute a predetermined performance (for example, a first special performance) multiple times until the reach state is reached, and when the predetermined performance is executed continuously, the number of executions indicates the expectation level, which is the transition response result,
an upper limit determination means for determining an upper limit of the number of consecutive executions of the predetermined performance based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that the upper limit determination means is configured so that when the result of the judgment by the judgment means is the transition response result, the upper limit is more likely to be higher than when the result of the transition is not the transition response result.

As shown in feature D6, in a configuration in which the expected degree of a transition response result is indicated by the number of consecutive executions of a specific effect, if the period until the transition to a reach state is short, the actual number of consecutive executions will be limited by that period. This raises concerns that even if it would be desirable to continue the specific effect up to the maximum, the opportunity to do so will be lost. Therefore, by applying the technical ideas shown in feature D1 etc. to such a configuration, the above-mentioned actual restrictions can be alleviated.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group C to Feature Group D described above.

<Features Group E>
The following feature E group has been made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stopped state on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1)."

Feature E1. An information acquisition means (a function for executing a winning process for an operating port in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (winning/losing information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than usual, based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a transition corresponding result (a winning result) which corresponds to the transition information;
A display unit (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
A variable display means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) is provided for displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the pictures in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means,
When the result of the judgment by the judgment means is the transition corresponding result, a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the transition corresponding result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special game state,
As a variable display mode of a pattern executed on the display screen when the game state is a predetermined game state, a special variable display mode (e.g., Super Reach D) is provided in which the pattern displayed on the display screen in a stopped state constitutes a part of the predetermined pattern combination and transitions to a reach state in which at least a part of the pattern is being variably displayed,
A related information storage means (a consecutive result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification/performance control device 140) for storing information related to the variable display mode of the previous game;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a transition timing determination means (a function of determining the timing of transition to a reach display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that determines the timing of transition to the reach state based on the information stored in the related information storage means when the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode.

According to feature E1, in a game round that corresponds to a special variable display mode, the timing of transition to a reach state is determined according to the variable display mode in the previous game round. In this way, by linking the previous game round with the current game round, it is possible to realize a diversification of presentation modes. This is preferable in terms of increasing the attention to the game.

Feature E2. In the special variable display mode, a predetermined effect (e.g., a first special effect) configured to have a predetermined execution period can be executed multiple times until the reach state is reached, and when the predetermined effect is executed continuously, the number of executions indicates the expectation level of the transition response result,
The gaming machine described in feature E1 is characterized in that the transition timing determination means is configured to determine the timing of transition to the reach state based on the information stored in the related information storage means when the variable display in the previous game round has ended with the specified presentation and the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode in the current game round.

Depending on the duration of a game round, it may be difficult to achieve the number of consecutive predetermined effects in the current game round alone. In a configuration in which the number of consecutive predetermined effects suggests the degree of expectation, which is the transition response result, such restrictions become stronger, and the relationship between the number of consecutive effects and the degree of expectation becomes more likely to be disrupted. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, if the previous game round ends with a predetermined effect, the predetermined effect executed in the previous game round can be reused in the current game round. In other words, by determining the timing of the transition to the reach state in accordance with the previous game round, it is possible to suitably suppress the excess or deficiency of the number of consecutive effects. Therefore, it is possible to effectively utilize the function of suggesting the degree of expectation by the succession of predetermined effects.

Feature E3. An information acquisition means (a function for executing a winning process for an operating port in the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (reserved ball storage area 432) for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the transition information (winning/losing information);
a game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than usual, based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a transition corresponding result (a winning result) which corresponds to the transition information;
A display unit (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
A variable display means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) is provided for displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the pictures in a combination corresponding to the determination result by the determination means,
When the result of the judgment by the judgment means is the transition corresponding result, a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the transition corresponding result is stopped and displayed on the display screen before the transition to the special game state,
As a variable display mode of a pattern executed on the display screen when the game state is a predetermined game state, a special variable display mode (e.g., Super Reach D) is provided in which the pattern displayed on the display screen in a stopped state constitutes a part of the predetermined pattern combination and transitions to a reach state in which at least a part of the pattern is being variably displayed,
In the special variable display mode, a predetermined performance configured to have a predetermined execution period can be executed a plurality of times until the reach state is reached, and when the predetermined performance is executed continuously, the number of executions indicates the expectation level of the transition response result,
A related information storage means (a continuous result counter in the RAM 444 of the notification/performance control device 140) for storing information regarding the execution status of the predetermined performance in the previous game round;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a transition timing determination means (a function of determining the timing of transition to a reach display in the MPU 442 of the notification/performance control device 140) that determines the timing of transition to the reach state based on the information stored in the related information storage means when the special variable display mode is executed as the variable display mode.

Depending on the duration of a game round, for example, it may be difficult to achieve the number of consecutive predetermined effects in the current game round alone. In a configuration in which the number of consecutive predetermined effects suggests the degree of expectation, which is the transition response result, such restrictions become stronger, and the relationship between the number of consecutive effects and the degree of expectation becomes more likely to be disrupted. Here, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, by determining the timing of transition to a reach state in the current game round taking into consideration the execution status of the predetermined effect in the previous game round, it becomes possible, for example, to reuse the predetermined effect executed in the previous game round in the current game round. This makes it possible to appropriately suppress excess or deficiency in the number of consecutive effects, and to effectively demonstrate the function of suggesting the degree of expectation by the succession of predetermined effects.

Feature E4. A continuous number determination means for determining the number of times the predetermined effect has been executed in succession until the start of the current game round when the previous game round has ended with the predetermined effect;
A setting means for setting the number of consecutive times of the predetermined performance in the current game based on the result of the determination by the determining means,
The gaming machine described in feature E2 or feature E3, wherein the transition timing determination means determines the transition timing for the current game round based on the number of times specified by the consecutive number determination means and the consecutive number of times set by the setting means.

According to the configuration shown in feature E4, if the predetermined effects are consecutive by the start of the current game round, the timing of transition to the reach state is determined based on the number of consecutive occurrences and the number of occurrences set for the current game round. With this configuration, the function of suggesting the degree of expectation by consecutively producing the predetermined effects can be optimally exerted.

Note that "consecutive" in this feature refers to the case where the specified effect is executed consecutively without any other effects intervening between the specified effects.

Feature E5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E4, further comprising a restricting means for restricting the determination of the transition timing by the transition timing determining means when the interval period from the end of the previous game round to the start of the current game round exceeds a reference period (e.g., 2 seconds).

When attempting to link with a previous game round, deciding the timing of the transition while taking into account the previous game round when the interval period is excessively long can be a cause of discomfort when attempting the above link. Therefore, by setting a reference period as the standard for deciding whether or not to link, and refraining from unreasonable linking if the actual interval period exceeds this reference period, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature E6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E5, further comprising a restricting means for restricting the determination of the transition timing by the transition timing determining means when the previous game turn corresponds to the transition to the reach state.

If a transition to a reach state has occurred in the previous game round, the result of the current transition determination will be displayed as the reach effect ends, making it clear that the game round has ended. Therefore, in such cases, by configuring the game so that no link is made with the previous game round, it is possible to prevent the feeling of discomfort caused by forced linking.

Feature E7. In the special variable display mode, a predetermined performance configured to have a predetermined execution period can be executed multiple times until the reach state is reached, and when the predetermined performance is executed continuously, the number of executions indicates the expectation level of the transition response result,
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that the transition timing determination means is configured to select one from a plurality of transition timing candidates, and the timing difference between the transition timings is specified to be an integer multiple of the execution period of the specified presentation.

When adjusting the number of times a specified performance is executed, by making the difference in transition timing an integer multiple of the execution period of the specified performance as described above, it is possible to effectively prevent excess or deficiency in the performance period when adjusting the number of times a specified performance is executed.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group D to Feature Group E described above.

<Feature Group F>
The following feature group F was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that states, "Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a changing picture on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the changing display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stopped state on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature F1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operation port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A grant determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a granting result corresponding to granting a bonus to a player;
In a gaming machine having a game number control means (a function of executing a game number control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game number operation is performed, with the game number operation being counted as one game number when the game number operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment means is reached and the game number operation is ended,
The game number control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game number operation for each game number and a maintenance period (fixed display time) during which the notification result is maintained,
A performance execution means (a symbol display device 253) is provided for performing a performance in parallel with the game operation when the game operation is being performed,
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect (e.g., a first special effect) is provided in which the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the effect execution means has a continuous execution means for continuously executing the predetermined effects during one game round,
The continuous execution means is configured to execute a predetermined presentation to be executed at the end of a game round so as to span the operation period and the maintenance period in that game round.

By repeating a specific presentation in each game round, the player can be given the impression that the game is progressing at a good tempo. This is preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. Here, if the maintenance period of the notification result corresponding to the result of the award judgment becomes extremely short, it is expected that there is a high possibility that the notification result will be overlooked. On the other hand, if the maintenance period is simply extended, the specific presentation, which is repeated at a good tempo, will stop between game rounds, which may hinder the achievement of the above-mentioned effect of increasing attention.

In this regard, in the configuration shown in this characteristic, the predetermined effect executed at the end of a game round is executed so as to span the operation period and maintenance period of that game round, so that the blank period until the predetermined effect is resumed in the next game round can be made small. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences caused by setting the maintenance period of the notification result to a certain extent.

Feature F2. The gaming machine described in Feature F1, characterized in that the operation period is not divisible by the execution period of the specified performance.

By making the execution period of the specified effect and the operation period of the game round action a non-integer multiple relationship, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the specified effect executed at the end of a game round spans both the operation period and the maintenance period.

Feature F3. The gaming machine described in Feature F2, wherein the maintenance period is longer than the remainder when the operation period is subtracted from the execution period of the specified effect.

According to the configuration shown in this characteristic, when game rounds are played consecutively, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect that is executed at the end of a previous game round from extending to the next game round. Avoiding interference with the next game round is preferable in terms of ensuring the relationship between the action for a game round and the effect that runs parallel to it.

Feature F4. As a game state, a first game state (a normal game state corresponding to a low frequency support mode) and a second game state (a normal game state corresponding to a high frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game operation is shorter than that of the first game state are provided;
The predetermined effect is an effect that is executed once in one game in the second gaming state,
In the first gaming state, the operation period of each game is configured to execute the predetermined performance a plurality of times,
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that the performance execution means is configured to execute the specified performance multiple times in each game when the first game state is activated.

According to feature F4, in the first gaming state, a predetermined presentation can be repeated during one game round to make it appear as if the game has entered the second gaming state. In other words, the rhythm of the game progress can be significantly changed, making it appear as if the game progress has suddenly accelerated. This prevents the game from becoming monotonous, and can more effectively increase the attention to the game. By applying the technical ideas shown in feature F1, etc. to this configuration, the difference between the first gaming state and the second gaming state can be made less noticeable.

Feature F5. A display unit (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a),
A display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) is provided for displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen in a variable manner, and then displaying the pictures in a final stop in a combination corresponding to a result of the determination by the award determination means.
When the predetermined performance is executed at the end of a game round, the pictures are variably displayed on the display screen so that the pictures become a picture combination corresponding to the award corresponding result, and are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen; when the predetermined performance is not executed at the end of a game round, the pictures are variably displayed on the display screen so that the pictures become a picture combination not corresponding to the award corresponding result, and are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F4, characterized in that the temporary stop display period during which the temporary stop display is executed and the final stop display period during which the final stop display is executed are configured to be shorter than the maintenance period.

By repeating the predetermined effects (variable display of images → temporary stop display), it is possible to make it appear as if the game is progressing one after another. Since the gap between the predetermined effects that occurs at the end of a game round can be made small, the gap when the predetermined effects are resumed in the next game round can be made less noticeable.

Feature F6. As a game state, a first game state (a normal game state corresponding to a low frequency support mode) and a second game state (a normal game state corresponding to a high frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game operation is shorter than that of the first game state are provided;
The predetermined effect is an effect that is executed once in one game in the second gaming state,
In the first gaming state, the operation period of each game is configured to execute the predetermined performance a plurality of times,
The effect execution means is configured to execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in each game when the first game state is established,
A second maintenance period, which is the maintenance period set in the second gaming state, is configured to be shorter than a first maintenance period, which is the maintenance period set in the first gaming state;
A gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that the provisional stop display period during which the provisional stop display is executed in the specified presentation is the same length as the second maintenance period.

As shown in this feature, by making the provisional stop display period the same length as the second maintenance period, the above-mentioned mimetic effect can be made even more suitable. However, with such a configuration, the difference between the provisional stop display period and the first maintenance period becomes more noticeable. Therefore, by applying the technical ideas shown in feature F1 etc. to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the difference between the first game state and the second game state from being easily identified from the presentation mode.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group E to Feature Group F described above.

<Feature Group G>
The following feature group G was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve regarding the background technology, which is as follows: "Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on a display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination, etc., is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various efforts have been made to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature G1. An information acquisition means for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function for executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162);
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A grant determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a granting result corresponding to granting a bonus to a player;
In a gaming machine having a game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (an operating port display section of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
The game number control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game number operation for each game number and a maintenance period (fixed display time) during which the notification result is maintained,
A performance execution means (a symbol display device 253) is provided for performing a performance in parallel with the game operation when the game operation is being performed,
The performance execution means includes a display unit (symbol display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a), and a variable display means (announcement/performance control device 140 and display control device 410) for displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable manner on the display screen, and then displaying the symbols in a combination corresponding to the result of the determination by the award determination means.
As the game states, a first game state (a normal game state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode) and a second game state (a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game operation is shorter than that in the first game state are provided,
A normal presentation mode and a special presentation mode are provided as presentation modes of the presentation execution means in the first gaming state,
In the normal performance mode, the display of the pattern on the display screen is shifted to a first stop display before the end timing of the game operation, and is shifted from the first stop display to the final stop display at the same timing as the end timing of the game operation,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, in the special presentation mode, the advance stop display is regulated, and the display of the image on the display screen transitions to the final stop display at the same timing as the end of the game play operation.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the first game state, which has a relatively slow progression speed, by switching from the normal presentation mode to the special presentation mode, the first stop display that had been executed up until that point is avoided, and the final stop display is executed without going through the first stop display. This makes it appear as if the period during which the notification result is maintained has been shortened. In this way, a configuration that artificially changes the progress speed of the game without shortening the period during which the notification result by the specified notification means is maintained can prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Note that the "transition from the advance stop display to the final stop display" in this feature includes a configuration in which the picture combination displayed by the advance stop display is still transitioned to the final stop display.

Feature G2. The gaming machine described in Feature G1, characterized in that the maintenance period determined by the period determination means is configured to be the same in the normal presentation mode and the special presentation mode in the first gaming state.

When differentiating between the normal presentation mode and the special presentation mode using the temporary stop display → final stop display executed in a series as shown in feature G1, the difference in progression speed can be changed even if the maintenance period is the same in both presentation modes. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear as if there is a difference in the progression speed of the game while avoiding complicating the basic operation of the gaming machine related to the game play control means.

Feature G3. A gaming machine according to Feature G1 or Feature G2, characterized in that the maintenance period determined by the period determination means is configured to be the same in the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

For example, if there is a difference between the operation period and the maintenance period in each game state, the difference in the progress speed described above can be made clear and the contrast can be emphasized by simultaneously performing a variable display and a stop display of the image. However, considering that the maintenance period is a period for notifying the player of the award determination result, it is not preferable to make the maintenance period extremely short in order to increase such a difference, and it is also not preferable to make the maintenance period extremely long, as this can give the player the impression that the game is being needlessly delayed. Therefore, it is practically difficult to increase the above difference. In this regard, if the maintenance period is made the same regardless of the game state, and a configuration is used in which a difference is generated by the advance stop display shown in feature G1, such a constraint can be suitably alleviated.

Feature G4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G3, characterized in that the future stop display is configured so that there is a greater chance of the same picture combination as the final stop display being displayed than of a picture combination different from the final stop display being displayed.

In a configuration in which the ahead stop display and the final stop display are connected in a sequence, as shown in feature G1, making the stop display period appear longer, the fact that the ahead stop display is merely temporary becomes apparent, and the effect shown in feature G1 above is not fully realized. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by focusing on a pattern in which the ahead stop display leads directly to the final stop display, it is possible to give the player the impression that the ahead stop display is part of the final stop display, making it possible to prevent the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature G5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G4, characterized in that the period during which the advance stop display is executed is the same as or shorter than the period during which the final stop display is executed.

When the first stop display goes from the final stop display, the first stop display period becomes excessively long, making the discrepancy with the operation of the specified notification means more noticeable. This is a cause for concern as it could give the player the impression that the game is being unnecessarily delayed. Therefore, by limiting the first stop display period to be equal to or shorter than the final stop display period when the first stop display goes from the final stop display, it is possible to prevent such inconveniences from occurring.

Feature G6. The maintenance period determined by the period determination means is configured to be the same in the normal presentation mode and the special presentation mode in the first gaming state;
A predetermined effect (for example, a first special effect) is provided as one of the effects performed by the effect execution means in parallel with the game operation, the effect execution period of which is shorter than the operation period,
The performance execution means has a means for executing the predetermined performance a plurality of times during the period from when the game operation is started until when the game operation is ended, and for finally displaying the plurality of pictures in accordance with the end of the game operation, when the special performance mode is set;
The predetermined effect includes a configuration in which the plurality of pictures displayed on the display screen are temporarily stopped after being variably displayed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the temporary stop display period when the temporary stop display is executed in the specified presentation is configured to be the same length as the maintenance period.

In order to make it appear as if the game progresses faster by repeating the variable display of the image → temporary stop display in the special effect mode, it is undesirable for there to be a difference between the temporary stop display period and the final stop display period. This is because a noticeable difference between the temporary stop display and the final stop display can be an opportunity to determine the timing of the end of a game round. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the temporary stop display period and the final stop display period are configured to match, even if the game round moves to the next game round while the specified effect is repeated, it becomes difficult to distinguish the difference between the temporary stop display and the final stop display, making it difficult to identify the boundary between game rounds. Therefore, the function of artificially generating a change in the progress speed can be preferably exerted.

Feature G7. The gaming machine described in Feature G6 is characterized in that the predetermined effect is the same as the effect executed in a game round in the second gaming state, and the execution period is configured to be the same length as the sum of the operation period and the maintenance period in the second gaming state.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by transitioning to the special presentation mode during the first game state, it is possible to make it appear as if the game has transitioned to the second game state. Here, when combined with feature G6, both the provisional stop display and the final stop display in the special presentation mode have the same appearance as the final stop display in the second game state, thereby making it possible to optimally exert the above-mentioned mimetic effect.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group F to Feature Group G described above.

<Feature H Group>
The following feature H group was made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays a changing picture on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will be generated, and the changing display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination, etc., is finally displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature H1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A bonus determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a bonus corresponding result (jackpot result) corresponding to the bonus being awarded to the player;
In a gaming machine having a game round control means (a function of executing a game round control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means (an operating port display section of the main display unit 87) so that the game round operation is performed, the game round being counted as one game round when the game round operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment means is reached and the game round operation is ended,
The game round control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game round operation for each game round,
The device is provided with a performance execution means (a function of executing a variable display control process in the MPU 442 of the symbol display device 253 and the notification/performance control device 140) for executing a predetermined performance (for example, a first special performance) in parallel with the game-use operation when the game-use operation is being performed,
As the predetermined performance, a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance are provided, each of which is configured so that a performance execution period is shorter than the operation period, and the performance execution means is configured to repeatedly execute the first predetermined performance during the operation period.
The first predetermined performance is configured to suggest the expectation level of the grant corresponding result based on the number of times the first predetermined performance is executed consecutively without the second predetermined performance being interposed,
a destination specifying means for specifying information regarding the operation period when the specific special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the grant determination, at a timing before the specific special information becomes the subject of the grant determination;
and an execution mode determination means for determining an execution mode of the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance in a current game round based on the operation period in the current game round determined by the period determination means and the information specified by the destination determination means.

In the configuration shown in feature H1, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of consecutive first predetermined effects. Here, if the first predetermined effects are to be consecutively performed in a subsequent game round alone, the number of consecutive first predetermined effects will depend on the operation period of the subsequent game round. For this reason, even if the number of consecutive first predetermined effects should be set to a large number, an event may occur in which the actual number of consecutive first predetermined effects is less than the desired number. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the operation period of the subsequent game round is taken into consideration when determining the execution mode (number of times and arrangement) of the first predetermined effects and the second predetermined effects in the current game round. As a result, for example, if it seems that the number of consecutive first predetermined effects cannot be sufficiently secured in the subsequent game round alone, the first predetermined effects can be started in advance in the current game round to make up for the shortage in the subsequent game round. In addition, if the number of consecutive first predetermined effects in the current game round is likely to be excessive, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by suppressing the succession of the first predetermined effects in the current game round.

Feature H2. The destination specification means has a function of specifying information regarding the result of the grant judgment when the specific special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the subject of the grant judgment, at a timing before the specific special information becomes the subject of the grant judgment,
The gaming machine described in feature H1, wherein the execution mode determination means determines the number of times the first predetermined performance can be executed consecutively from the information determined by the destination determination means, and determines the execution modes of the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance in the current game round based on the determination result and the operation period in the current game round.

As shown in Feature H2, by identifying the award determination result and operation period information for the subsequent play round in advance, it is possible to grasp the number of consecutive first predetermined effects corresponding to the subsequent play round. Based on this, the performance mode for the current play round can be determined, thereby making it possible to more optimally exert the function shown in Feature H1.

Feature H3. A display means (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
and a display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the pictures in a picture combination corresponding to the judgment result;
When the result of the award determination by the award determination means becomes the award corresponding result, a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the award corresponding result is stopped and displayed on the display screen,
As one of the variable display modes of the patterns on the display screen, a special variable display mode is provided in which the patterns displayed in a stopped state on the display screen constitute a part of the predetermined pattern combination and transition to a ready-to-win state in which at least a part of the patterns is being variably displayed,
A gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, characterized in that when the current game round corresponds to the special variable display mode, the determination of the execution mode based on the information identified by the destination identification means is regulated for the execution mode determination means.

As shown in feature H3, if the current game round corresponds to a transition to a reach state, setting the first and second predetermined effects to match the subsequent game round places greater restrictions on the effects in the current game round. This is a cause for concern that the effects in the current game round may become stale. Therefore, in such a case, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by determining the execution mode of the first and second predetermined effects without considering subsequent game rounds.

Feature H4. A display means (pattern display device 253) having a display screen (display screen 253a);
and a display control means (announcement/performance control device 140 and a display control device 410) for displaying a plurality of pictures on the display screen in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the pictures in a picture combination corresponding to the judgment result;
When the result of the award determination by the award determination means becomes the award corresponding result, a predetermined picture combination corresponding to the award corresponding result is stopped and displayed on the display screen,
As one of the variable display modes of the patterns on the display screen, a special variable display mode is provided in which the patterns displayed in a stopped state on the display screen constitute a part of the predetermined pattern combination and transition to a ready-to-win state in which at least a part of the patterns is being variably displayed,
The gaming machine described in any one of Features H1 to H3, characterized in that, when the game turn that is the subject of the destination determination corresponds to the special variable display mode, the destination determination means is configured to determine information regarding the period of the operation period in that game turn until the transition to the reach state.

If the subsequent play round corresponds to a special variable display mode (reach), the period during which the specified effect can be executed is significantly limited. In other words, the period during which the specified effect can be executed is limited to the period before the transition to the reach state. Therefore, when linking with the current play round as shown in feature H1, by specifying information regarding the period until the transition to the reach state in the subsequent play round, linking with the play round can be optimized.

Feature H5. The gaming machine described in Feature H4, characterized in that the execution mode determination means is configured to determine the execution mode of the first and second predetermined effects in a current game turn based on the operation period in the current game turn determined by the period determination means and the information identified by the future identification means when the subsequent game turn corresponds to the special variable display mode.

As shown in feature H4, if the subsequent game round corresponds to a special variable display mode (reach), the technical idea shown in feature H4 can be suitably embodied by determining the execution mode of the first and second predetermined effects in the current game round, taking into account the operation period of the current game round and the period until the transition to the reach state in the subsequent game round.

Feature H6. A gaming machine according to Feature H4 or Feature H5, characterized in that, when the execution mode determination means takes into consideration a subsequent game round when determining the execution mode for the current game round, the execution mode determination means determines the execution modes of the first and second predetermined effects in the subsequent game round when determining the execution modes of the first and second predetermined effects in the current game round.

When linking the current game round with a subsequent game round, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the execution mode for the current game round is determined at the same time as the execution mode for the subsequent game round is determined. In this way, by restricting changes to the execution mode for the subsequent game round, it is possible to avoid the current game round failing to effectively support the subsequent game round.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group G to Feature Group H described above.

<Characteristics Group I>
The following feature I group has been made with a problem that the invention is trying to solve, regarding the background technology that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a picture display device that displays pictures in a variable manner on the display screen. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a winning ball enters an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, will occur, and the variable display of pictures will begin. If the lottery is won, a specific picture combination or the like is displayed in a final stopped state on the display screen, and the gaming state transitions to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).""In recent years, various ideas have been devised to increase attention to games. However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration of gaming machines in terms of realizing increased attention to games."

Feature I1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A grant determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a granting result corresponding to granting a bonus to a player;
In a gaming machine having a game number control means (a function of executing a game number control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game number operation is performed, with the game number operation being counted as one game number when the game number operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment means is reached and the game number operation is ended,
The game round control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game round operation for each game round,
A performance execution means (a symbol display device 253) is provided for performing a performance in parallel with the game operation when the game operation is being performed,
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect (e.g., a first special effect to a third special effect) is provided, the effect execution period of which is shorter than the operation period, and the effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times during one game round.
A number-of-plays information storage means (a game number counter in the RAM 444 of the notification/performance control device 140) for storing number-of-plays information that is updated with the execution of the predetermined performance and corresponds to the number of times the predetermined performance has been executed;
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a predetermined game processing when the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means becomes information corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times) (a function for switching the presentation mode in the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140).

The execution period of the predetermined effect shown in feature I1 is set shorter than the operation period of the game round operation, and is configured to be executed multiple times during a game round. By repeating the predetermined effect at a pitch shorter than the game round, it is possible to give the player the impression that the timing of the execution of the predetermined game processing is faster than when, for example, the predetermined game processing is executed in response to the progress of a game round, and it can also contribute to diversifying the timing. This realizes diversification of game effects, etc., and contributes to increasing attention to the game.

Feature I2. An information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A grant determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a granting result corresponding to granting a bonus to a player;
In a gaming machine having a game number control means (a function of executing a game number control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game number operation is performed, with the game number operation being counted as one game number when the game number operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment means is reached and the game number operation is ended,
The game number control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game number operation for each game number and a maintenance period (fixed display time) during which the notification result is maintained,
A performance execution means (a symbol display device 253) is provided for performing a performance in parallel with the game operation when the game operation is being performed,
As one of the effects, a predetermined effect (e.g., a first special effect to a third special effect) is provided, the effect execution period of which is shorter than the operation period, and the effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined effect a plurality of times during one game round.
A frequency information storage means for storing frequency information corresponding to the number of times the predetermined performance has been executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for executing a specified game processing based on the fact that the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means becomes information corresponding to a specified number of times (e.g., 10 times) which is greater than the maximum number of times (e.g., 7 times) that the specified presentation can be executed in one game round (a function for switching presentation modes in the MPU 442 of the notification/presentation control device 140).

The predetermined effect shown in feature I1 has an effect execution period set shorter than the operation period of the game round operation, and is configured to be executed multiple times during a game round. The predetermined effect is repeated at a pitch shorter than the game round, so that the number of times information is updated, and when the predetermined effect has been repeated over multiple game rounds, the predetermined game processing is executed when the number of times reaches the predetermined number. With this configuration, it is possible to give the player the impression that the timing at which the predetermined game processing is executed is faster than when the predetermined game processing is executed as a trigger for the progression of a game round, and it can also contribute to diversifying the timing.

In addition, the description in this characteristic that "A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a predetermined game process based on the number of times stored in the number information storage means reaching a predetermined number of times that is greater than the maximum number of times that the predetermined presentation can be executed in one game play" can also be changed to "A gaming machine characterized by having a means for executing a predetermined game process based on the number of times stored in the number storage means reaching a predetermined number, and being configured so that the predetermined number of times is greater than the maximum number of times that the predetermined presentation can be executed in one game play."

Feature I3. An information acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for an operating port in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (reserved information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
An acquired information storage means (a reserved ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A grant determination means (a function of executing a process such as a winning/losing lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a granting result corresponding to granting a bonus to a player;
In a gaming machine having a game number control means (a function of executing a game number control process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game number operation is performed, with the game number operation being counted as one game number when the game number operation is started and the notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment means is reached and the game number operation is ended,
The game number control means has a period determination means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining an operation period (variable display time) of the game number operation for each game number and a maintenance period (fixed display time) during which the notification result is maintained,
A performance execution means (a symbol display device 253) is provided for performing a performance in parallel with the game operation when the game operation is being performed,
As the game states, a first game state (a normal game state corresponding to a low-frequency support mode) and a second game state (a normal game state corresponding to a high-frequency support mode) in which the operation period of the game operation is shorter than that in the first game state are provided,
The performance execution means includes:
A first execution means for executing a first effect multiple times in a game in the first game state, the first effect being configured so that a performance execution period is shorter than the operation period in the first game state;
a second execution means for executing a second effect, the second effect having an effect execution period that is the same as the operation period in the second gaming state, once in a game in the second gaming state;
A first storage means for storing information corresponding to the number of times the first performance has been executed;
A second storage means for storing information corresponding to the number of times the second performance has been executed;
A gaming machine characterized by having a processing execution means for executing a predetermined gaming process when the information stored in the first storage means or the second storage means becomes information corresponding to predetermined reference information.

In the first game state, where the game progresses slower than in the second game state, the first presentation is repeatedly executed during one game round, and when the number of times the first presentation is executed reaches a reference number (reference information), a predetermined game process is executed. The simulated game progress speed in the first game state can be made to approach that of the second game state. In this configuration, it is possible to make the game appear to progress quickly even in the first game state, which is originally a slow game progress speed, and this can contribute to increasing attention to the game in the first game state.

Feature I4. A performance data storage means for storing performance data of the performance executed by the performance execution means is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the first effect and the second effect are both effects executed using predetermined effect data stored in the effect data storage means.

The same effect as the second effect executed in the second game state, where the game progresses at a faster speed, is reproduced in the first game state, making it appear as if the game has transitioned from the first game state to the second game state. This helps prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The configuration shown in this feature can also be "a gaming machine described in feature I3, characterized in that the first presentation is the same as the second presentation."

Feature I5. A first effect setting mode and a second effect setting mode are provided as effect setting modes of the effect execution means in the first gaming state;
The gaming machine described in feature I3 or feature I4 is characterized in that the first execution means is configured to execute the first performance multiple times in a game session in the second performance setting mode when the first gaming state is in the second performance setting mode.

According to feature I5, the first presentation setting mode/second presentation setting mode is switched during the first game state, and by transitioning to the second presentation mode, it is possible to make it appear as if the game progress is accelerating, just like in the second game state.

Feature I6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features I3 to I5, characterized in that the process execution means is configured to transition the effect setting mode from the second effect setting mode to the first effect setting mode when the information stored in the first storage means becomes information corresponding to the predetermined reference information.

According to feature I6, when the first effect executed in the second effect setting mode reaches a reference number of times, the effect setting mode switches to the first effect setting mode. This configuration enhances the contrast in game progress.

Feature I7. The gaming machine described in Feature I6 is characterized in that the process execution means is configured to set the effect setting mode to the first effect setting mode when the information stored in the second storage means becomes information corresponding to the predetermined reference information.

Feature I7 makes it possible to make the behavior of the first gaming state in the second presentation setting mode closer to the behavior of the second gaming state, thereby enhancing the pseudo-other effect that makes it appear as if the first gaming state has been transitioned to the second gaming state.

Feature I8. A reference information setting means for setting the predetermined reference information is provided,
A gaming machine described in any one of features I2 to I7, characterized in that the standard information setting means has a means for setting the same information in the first gaming state as the specified standard information set in the second gaming state.

Feature I8 makes it possible to approximate the behavior when the second game state changes to the first presentation mode and when the first game state (second presentation mode) changes to the first presentation mode. This is preferable in terms of enhancing the mimetic effect that makes it appear as if the game state has transitioned to the second game state during the first game state.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas presented in Feature Group A to Feature Group H to Feature Group I described above.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that includes an operating means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by the player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage (guiding passage 103) that guides the launched game ball to a specified game area, and each game component (game nail 38, etc.) arranged within the game area (game area PE), and that awards a bonus to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section (general winning opening 81, etc.) of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols in a variable manner and then displays the series of symbols in a final stopped state, in which the variation of the symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the variation of the symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern sequence, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operating means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operating means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 80... Game board unit, 80a... Play area formation body, 82... Variable winning device, 83a... Upper operating port, 83b... Lower operating port, 87... Main display unit, 91... Electric role, 140... Notification and performance control device, 162... Main control device, 253... Pattern display device, 253a... Display screen, 402... MPU, 403... ROM, 404... RAM, 410... Display control device, 442... MPU, 443... ROM, 444... RAM, ME... Variable display area, PE... Play area, SE... Reduced display area.

Claims (1)

an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a grant determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to a grant corresponding result corresponding to granting a privilege to a player;
The gaming machine is provided with a game round control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game round operation is performed, with one game round being counted as a single game round, from the start of the game round operation to the end of the game round operation due to a notification result corresponding to the judgment result of the award judgment means.

Images